Toshiba Webcam satellite p100 User Manual

Toshiba Personal Computer  
Satellite P100 Series  
Maintenance Manual  
TOSHIBA CORPORATION  
File Number 960-Q02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preface  
This maintenance manual describes how to perform hardware service maintenance for the  
Toshiba Personal Computer Satellite P100 Series.  
The procedures described in this manual are intended to help service technicians isolate  
faulty Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) and replace them in the field.  
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS  
Four types of messages are used in this manual to bring important information to your  
attention. Each of these messages will be italicized and identified as shown below.  
DANGER: “Danger” indicates the existence of a hazard that could result in death or  
serious bodily injury, if the safety instruction is not observed.  
WARNING: “Warning” indicates the existence of a hazard that could result in bodily  
injury, if the safety instruction is not observed.  
CAUTION: “Caution” indicates the existence of a hazard that could result in property  
damage, if the safety instruction is not observed.  
NOTE: “Note” contains general information that relates to your safe maintenance service.  
Improper repair of the computer may result in safety hazards. Toshiba requires service  
technicians and authorized dealers or service providers to ensure the following safety  
precautions are adhered to strictly.  
Be sure to fasten screws securely with the right screwdriver. If a screw is not fully  
fastened, it could come loose, creating a danger of a short circuit, which could cause  
overheating, smoke or fire.  
If you replace the battery pack or RTC battery, be sure to use only the same model  
battery or an equivalent battery recommended by Toshiba. Installation of the wrong  
battery can cause the battery to explode.  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The manual is divided into the following parts:  
Chapter 1  
Chapter 2  
Chapter 3  
Chapter 4  
Hardware Overview describes the Satellite P100 system unit and each  
FRU.  
Troubleshooting Procedures explains how to diagnose and resolve  
FRU problems.  
Test and Diagnostics describes how to perform test and diagnostic  
operations for maintenance service.  
Replacement Procedures describes the removal and replacement of the  
FRUs.  
Appendices The appendices describe the following:  
Handling the LCD Module  
Board layout  
Pin assignments  
Keyboard scan/character codes  
Key layout  
Wiring diagrams  
BIOS Rewrite Procedures  
EC/KBC Rewrite Procedures  
Reliability  
4
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Conventions  
This manual uses the following formats to describe, identify, and highlight terms and  
operating procedures.  
Acronyms  
On the first appearance and whenever necessary for clarification acronyms are enclosed in  
parentheses following their definition. For example:  
Read Only Memory (ROM)  
Keys  
Keys are used in the text to describe many operations. The key top symbol as it appears on  
the keyboard is printed in boldface type.  
Key operation  
Some operations require you to simultaneously use two or more keys. We identify such  
operations by the key top symbols separated by a plus (+) sign. For example, Ctrl + Pause  
(Break) means you must hold down Ctrl and at the same time press Pause (Break). If  
three keys are used, hold down the first two and at the same time press the third.  
User input  
Text that you are instructed to type in is shown in the boldface type below:  
DISKCOPY A: B:  
The display  
Text generated by the computer that appears on its display is presented in the typeface  
below:  
Format complete  
System transferred  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview  
1.1  
1.2  
1.3  
1.4  
Features..........................................................................................................................1  
System Block Diagram ..................................................................................................7  
2.5-inch Hard Disk Drive.............................................................................................11  
Optical Drive................................................................................................................16  
1.4.1  
1.4.2  
DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW Drive.............................................................16  
DVD Super Multi Drive.........................................................................21  
1.5  
1.6  
Keyboard......................................................................................................................27  
TFT Color Display.......................................................................................................28  
1.6.1  
1.6.2  
LCD Module ..........................................................................................28  
FL Inverter Board...................................................................................29  
1.7  
1.8  
Power Supply...............................................................................................................30  
Batteries .......................................................................................................................32  
1.8.1  
1.8.2  
1.8.3  
Main Battery...........................................................................................32  
Battery Charging Control.......................................................................33  
RTC battery............................................................................................34  
1.9  
AC Adapter ..................................................................................................................35  
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.1  
2.2  
2.3  
Troubleshooting.............................................................................................................1  
Troubleshooting Flowchart............................................................................................3  
Power Supply Troubleshooting .....................................................................................7  
Procedure 1  
Procedure 2  
Procedure 3  
Procedure 4  
Power Status Check ...................................................................7  
Error Code Check ......................................................................9  
Connection Check....................................................................10  
Charging Check .......................................................................10  
Procedure 5  
Replacement Check ................................................................ 12  
2.4  
System Board Troubleshooting .................................................................................. 13  
6
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Procedure 1  
Procedure 2  
Message Check ....................................................................... 14  
Debugging Port Check............................................................ 16  
Procedure 3  
Procedure 4  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check............................ 21  
Replacement Check ................................................................ 21  
2.5  
2.6  
USB FDD Troubleshooting ........................................................................................ 22  
Procedure 1  
Procedure 2  
Procedure 3  
FDD Head Cleaning Check .................................................... 22  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check............................ 23  
Connector Check and Replacement Check............................. 24  
2.5” HDD Troubleshooting......................................................................................... 26  
Procedure 1  
Procedure 2  
Procedure 3  
Procedure 4  
Procedure 5  
Partition Check........................................................................ 26  
Message Check ....................................................................... 27  
Format Check.......................................................................... 28  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check............................ 29  
Connector Check and Replacement Check............................. 30  
2.7  
2.8  
Keyboard Troubleshooting ......................................................................................... 31  
Procedure 1  
Procedure 2  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check............................ 31  
Connector Check and Replacement Check............................. 32  
Touch pad Troubleshooting........................................................................................ 33  
Procedure 1  
Procedure 2  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check............................ 33  
Connector Check and Replacement Check............................. 34  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.9  
Display Troubleshooting..............................................................................................35  
Procedure 1  
Procedure 2  
Procedure 3  
Procedure 4  
External Monitor Check...........................................................35  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check.............................35  
Connector and Cable Check ....................................................36  
Replacement Check .................................................................37  
2.10 Optical Disk Drive Troubleshooting............................................................................38  
Procedure 1  
Procedure 2  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check.............................38  
Connector Check and Replacement Check..............................38  
2.11 Modem Troubleshooting..............................................................................................39  
Procedure 1  
Procedure 2  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check.............................39  
Connector Check and Replacement Check..............................39  
2.12 LAN Troubleshooting..................................................................................................41  
Procedure 1  
Procedure 2  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check.............................41  
Connector Check and Replacement Check..............................41  
2.13 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting...................................................................................42  
Procedure 1  
Procedure 2  
Procedure 3  
Transmitting-Receiving Check................................................42  
Antennas' Connection Check...................................................43  
Replacement Check .................................................................44  
2.14 Sound Troubleshooting................................................................................................45  
Procedure 1  
Procedure 2  
Procedure 3  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check.............................45  
Connector Check......................................................................45  
Replacement Check .................................................................46  
2.15 VGA Troubleshooting..................................................................................................47  
Procedure 1  
Procedure 2  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check.............................47  
Connector Check and Replacement Check.............................47  
2.16 Fingerprint Troubleshooting........................................................................................49  
Procedure 1  
Procedure 2  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check.............................49  
Connector Check and Replacement Check.............................49  
2.17 Bluetooth Troubleshooting ..........................................................................................50  
Procedure 1  
Procedure 2  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check.............................50  
Connector Check and Replacement Check.............................50  
8
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Test Program for Field  
3.1  
3.2  
3.3  
3.4  
3.5  
3.6  
3.7  
3.8  
3.9  
Tests and Diagnostics Software Overview................................................................. 3-3  
Executing the Diagnostic Test ................................................................................... 3-4  
Subtest names............................................................................................................. 3-8  
System Test.............................................................................................................. 3-11  
Memory Test............................................................................................................ 3-13  
Keyboard Test.......................................................................................................... 3-16  
Display Test ............................................................................................................. 3-19  
Floppy Disk Test...................................................................................................... 3-34  
Hard Disk Test......................................................................................................... 3-36  
3.10 Real Time Clock Test .............................................................................................. 3-39  
3.11 Cache Memory Test................................................................................................. 3-41  
3.12 High Resolution Display Test.................................................................................. 3-43  
3.13 Multimedia Test....................................................................................................... 3-49  
3.14 MEMORY2 Test...................................................................................................... 3-50  
3.15 Error Codes and Error Status Names....................................................................... 3-52  
3.16 Running Test............................................................................................................ 3-54  
3.17 DMI INFORMATION............................................................................................. 3-55  
3.17.1  
3.17.2  
Check DMI Information………………………………………… 3-55  
Write DMI Information……………………………………………3-55  
3.18 Log Utilities ............................................................................................................. 3-57  
3.18.1 Operations…………………………………………………………3-57  
3.19 System Configuration .............................................................................................. 3-59  
3.20 Running Test Edit Item............................................................................................ 3-60  
3.20.1  
3.20.2  
Function Description………………………………………………3-60  
Operation Description……………………………………………3-60  
3.21 Common Tests an Operation ..................................................................................... 3-62  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.21.1  
3.21.2  
3.21.3  
How to operate a window …………………………………………3-62  
How to Stop the Test Program ……………………………………. 3-62  
Test Status Screen …………………………………………………3-62  
3.21.4 Test Stop Display……………………………………………………3-64  
How to enter data ……………………………………………………….. 3-64  
3.21.5  
Chapter 4 Replacement Procedures  
4.1  
Overview.................................................................................................................... 4-1  
Safety Precautions................................................................................................ 4-2  
Before You Begin ................................................................................................ 4-3  
Disassembly Procedure........................................................................................ 4-4  
Assembly Procedure ............................................................................................ 4-5  
Tools and Equipment........................................................................................... 4-5  
Screw Tightening Torque .................................................................................... 4-6  
Grip Color............................................................................................................ 4-6  
Screw Notation .................................................................................................... 4-7  
Battery pack ............................................................................................................... 4-8  
PC card..................................................................................................................... 4-10  
HDD......................................................................................................................... 4-12  
Wireless LAN card .................................................................................................. 4-16  
Memory module....................................................................................................... 4-18  
Keyboard.................................................................................................................. 4-21  
LED Board............................................................................................................... 4-24  
Optical disk drive..................................................................................................... 4-26  
4.2  
4.3  
4.4  
4.5  
4.6  
4.7  
4.8  
4.9  
4.10 Display assembly ..................................................................................................... 4-28  
4.11 Bluetooth assembly.................................................................................................. 4-33  
4.12 Cover assembly........................................................................................................ 4-38  
4.13 Touch pad................................................................................................................. 4-40  
4.14 Audio board ............................................................................................................ 4-40  
4.15 Fingerprint board ..................................................................................................... 4-41  
4.16 USB board................................................................................................................ 4-42  
4.17 System board............................................................................................................4-45  
10  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.18 CPU..........................................................................................................................4-47  
4.19 VGA heat sink..........................................................................................................4-50  
4.20 LCD unit / FL inverter............................................................................................. 4-52  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module ........................................................................... A-1  
Appendix B Board Layout .................................................................................................B-1  
Appendix C Pin Assignments.............................................................................................C-1  
Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes .................................................................. D-1  
Appendix E Key Layout.....................................................................................................E-1  
Appendix F Wiring Diagrams............................................................................................F-1  
Appendix G BIOS Rewrite Procedures............................................................................. G-1  
Appendix H EC/KBC Rewrite Procedures........................................................................ H-1  
Appendix I Reliability........................................................................................................I-1  
12  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
Hardware Overview  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
Hardware Overview  
1
Hardware Overview  
1-2  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hardware Overview  
Chapter 1  
Chapter 1  
Contents  
1.1  
1.2  
1.3  
1.4  
Features..........................................................................................................................1  
System Block Diagram ..................................................................................................7  
2.5-inch Hard Disk Drive.............................................................................................11  
Optical Drive................................................................................................................16  
1.4.1  
1.4.2  
DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW Drive ............................................................16  
DVD Super Multi Drive.........................................................................21  
1.5  
1.6  
Keyboard......................................................................................................................27  
TFT Color Display.......................................................................................................28  
1.6.1  
1.6.2  
LCD Module ..........................................................................................28  
FL Inverter Board...................................................................................29  
1.7  
1.8  
Power Supply...............................................................................................................30  
Batteries .......................................................................................................................32  
1.8.1  
1.8.2  
1.8.3  
Main Battery...........................................................................................32  
Battery Charging Control.......................................................................33  
RTC battery............................................................................................34  
1.9  
AC Adapter ..................................................................................................................35  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
Hardware Overview  
Figures  
Figure 1-1  
Figure 1-2  
Figure 1-3  
Figure 1-4  
Figure 1-5  
Figure 1-6  
Figure 1-7  
Front of the computer and the system units configuration ................................6  
System block diagram........................................................................................7  
2.5-inch HDD...................................................................................................11  
DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW drive.......................................................................16  
DVD Super Muti drive.....................................................................................21  
Keyboard..........................................................................................................27  
LCD module.....................................................................................................28  
Tables  
Table 1-1  
Table 1-2  
Table 1-3  
Table 1-4  
Table 1-5  
Table 1-6  
Table 1-7  
Table 1-8  
Table 1-9  
Table 1-10  
Table 1-11  
Table 1-12  
Table 1-13  
Table 1-14  
2.5-inch HDD dimensions ...............................................................................11  
2.5-inch HDD specifications............................................................................12  
DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW drive outline dimensions........................................16  
DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW drive specifications................................................17  
DVD Super Multi drive outline dimensions....................................................21  
DVD Super Multi drive specifications ............................................................22  
LCD module specifications..............................................................................28  
FL inverter board specifications ......................................................................29  
Power supply output rating..............................................................................31  
Battery specifications.......................................................................................32  
Time required for charges of main battery ......................................................33  
Data preservation time.....................................................................................33  
Time required for charges of RTC battery.......................................................34  
AC adapter specifications ................................................................................35  
1-2  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview  
Features  
1.1 Features  
The Satellite P100 (Intel Platform) series are 2 spindle PCs running  
Intel® Celeron® M Processor 410 or higher.  
Intel® Core™ Solo Processor T1300 or higher.  
Intel® Core™ Duo Processor T2300 or higher.  
The features are listed below.  
θ Microprocessor  
Microprocessor that is used will be different by the model.  
It supports processors as follows  
Intel Core Duo  
Intel Core Solo  
T2300(1.66GHz)  
T2400(1.83GHz),  
T2500 (2GHz),  
T2600(2.16Gz) ,  
T2700(2.33Gz)  
T1400(1.83GHz)  
T1300 (1.66GHz)  
FSB : 667MHz  
Intel Celeron-M (Yonah core based)  
410  
420  
430  
FSB 533MHz  
Max. power consumption : 31W  
θ Memory  
Two DDRII SO-DIMM (533/667MHz specification compliant) up to 4GB can be  
upgraded through Memory Module Slot. Maximum upgradeable system memory may  
depend on the model  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview  
θ VRAM  
Shared with System RAM for Intel 945 GM.  
NVIDIA G71M /G72MV/G73M external graphics for Intel 945 PM.  
θ HDD  
40GB, 60GB, 80GB, 100GB, and 120GB internal drives. 2.5 inch x 9.5mm height.  
160GB internal drives. 2.5 inch x 12.7mm height.  
θ USB FDD (Option)  
Toshiba external USB FDD for option  
θ Display  
LCD  
17.1-inch, WXGA+ (1,440x 900 dots), High-brightness, CSV, amorphous silicon  
TFT color display.  
17.1-inch, WSXGA+ (1,680x1, 050 dots), High-brightness, CSV, amorphous silicon  
TFT color display.  
CRT  
Supported via a RGB connector.  
TV-out  
The 4-pin S-Video port is compatible with PAL or NTSC TV standard.  
DVI  
Digital Video Interface port supported  
θ Keyboard  
Toshiba Standard keyboard with 103 keys (desktop-style), Support Windows keys &  
Application keys. (Toshiba standard layout) Standard pitch, 2.5mm travel length.  
Multi-langue support  
2
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview  
θ PC card slot  
The PC card slot (PCMCIA) accommodates one 5mm Type II card. The slot support  
16-bit PC cards and Card Bus PC cards. Card Bus supports 32-bit PC cards.  
θ Optical devices  
A DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW drive or DVD Super Multi drive is equipped.  
θ Battery  
The RTC battery is equipped inside the computer.  
It is good with no external power source for 1month on average.  
The main battery is a detachable lithium ion battery.  
6 cell Li-Ion 10.8v/4000mAh  
9 cell Li-Ion 10.8v/6000mAh  
θ USB (Universal Serial Bus)  
4 USB ports are provided. The ports comply with the USB2.0 standard, which  
enables data transfer speeds 40 times faster than USB1.1 standard. USB1.1 is also  
supported.  
θ Sound system  
Internal stereo speaker, Harman/Kardon (Odessey II) –GGEC, external monaural  
microphone connector, Line in, stereo headphone connector/SPDIF is also equipped.  
θ Wireless LAN  
The wireless LAN is equipped on the mini card slot.  
θ LAN/MODEM  
Connectors for LAN and Modem are separately mounted.  
θ CIR  
CIR is equipped for Remote controller  
θ 1394  
One 1394 port is equipped.  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview  
θ Express Card  
ExpressCard/34 and ExpressCard/54 are supported.  
θ Multiple Digital Media Card Slot  
MD/MS/MS pro/SDIO/MMC are supported  
θ Bluetooth  
USB Bluetooth Module (BTO) V2.0 & EDR(Enhanced Data Rate) equipped  
θ Security  
Kensington Lock,  
Fingerprint –Enhanced Lock is also equipped.  
4
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview  
Figure 1-1 Front of the computer and the system units’ configuration  
6
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview  
1.2 System Block Diagram  
Figure 1-2 shows the system block diagram.  
Figure 1-2 System block diagram for Intel Platform Platform  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview  
The PC contains the following components.  
θ CPU  
Intel Core Duo  
Intel Core Solo  
T2300(1.66GHz)  
T2400(1.83GHz),  
T2500 (2GHz),  
T2600(2.16Gz) ,  
T2700(2.33Gz)  
T1400(1.83GHz)  
T1300 (1.66GHz)  
FSB : 667MHz  
Intel Celeron-M (Yonah core based)  
410  
420  
430  
FSB 533MHz  
θ Memory  
Two memory slots capable of accepting DDRII-SDRAM 256MB, 512MB or 1GB  
memory modules for a maximum of 4GB.  
200-pin SO-DIMM  
1.8V operation  
PC2 4200 support/PC2  
θ BIOS ROM (Flash memory)  
8Mbit  
θ Chipset  
This gate array has the following elements and functions.  
North Bridge (Intel 945GM/945PM (GMCH, C-step))  
Dothan-M processor System Bus support  
DRAM Controller : DDRII 533/667 support  
DMI  
1466-ball 37.5mmx37.5mm Mirco FC-BGA Package  
8
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview  
South Bridge (Intel 82801GBM (ICH7-M))  
PCI slot  
PCI Express  
IDE controller  
Serial ATA Host Controller  
DMA controller  
USB host interface  
USB 2.0 host controller  
UHCI host controller  
Interrupt controller  
SM Bus interface  
ACPI Power management  
Firmware Hub interface  
Low Pin count (LPC) interface  
Real time clock  
Intel High Definition Audio Interface  
652-pin 31mmx31mm mBGA Package  
θ PC card controller (PCI7412, Texas Instrument-made)  
PCI Interface (PCI Rev. 2.3)  
PC Card Controller  
θ VGA controller  
Intel VGA  
- VRAM 64MB/128MB  
- LVDS  
NVIDIA G71M /G72MV/G73M  
- VRAM 128MB/256MB/512MB  
- LVDS  
θ Other main system chips  
Clock Generator (ICS-made ICS954206 x 1)  
EC/KBC (NS97551 x 1)  
HD Audio  
Audio AMP (Maxim 9750x1)  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview  
θ Mini Card  
Wireless LAN card (BTO)  
2.4GHz DSSS/OFDM LAN card is equipped. Conformity with IEEE 802.11b/g  
and IEEE 802.11a/b/g.. Transfer speed maximum is 54Mbit/sec. supports 128bit  
WEP.  
θ LAN (Intel)  
Controls LAN.  
Intel EP82562T (Ekron) supports 10/100M LAN  
Intel 82573L (Vidalia) supports GigaLan.  
θ MODEM (Conexant x 1)  
Supported by on board Modem + DAA daughter card.  
Data and FAX transmission is available.  
Supports ITU-TV.90.  
The transfer speed of data receiving is 56kbps, of data sending is 33.6kbps and of  
FAX is 14.4kbps. Actual speed depends on the quality of the line used.  
Connected to telephone line through RJ11 MOD  
θ Blue tooth  
Mini USB Bluetooth Module (BTO) V2.0.  
10  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview  
1.3 2.5-inch Hard Disk Drive  
A compact, high-capacity HDD with a height of 9.5mm. Contains a 2.5-inch magnetic disk  
and magnetic heads.  
Figure 1-3 shows a view of the 2.5-inch HDD and Tables 1-1 and 1-2 list the specifications.  
Figure 1-3 2.5-inch HDD  
Table 1-1 2.5-inch HDD dimensions  
Standard value  
TOSHIBA  
TOSHIBA  
TOSHIBA  
TOSHIBA  
TOSHIBA  
Parameter  
MK1032GS MK8032GS MK6032GS MK4032GS MK1234GS  
X
X
X
69.85  
9.5  
X
X
Width (mm)  
Outline  
Height (mm)  
Depth (mm)  
Weight (g)  
dimens  
ions  
100.0  
101//102  
101/102  
101/102  
97/98  
101/102  
Parameter  
Standard value  
FUJITSU FUJITSU FUJITSU FUJITSU FUJITSU FUJITSU  
MHV2040 MHV2060 MHV2080 MHV2100 MHV2120 MHV2160  
BH  
BH  
BH  
BH  
BH  
BT  
Width  
(mm)  
70.0  
Outline  
Height  
(mm)  
9.5  
12.7  
dimensi  
ons  
Depth  
(mm)  
100.0  
96 (min.)  
101(Max)  
135 (max)  
Weight  
(g)  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview  
Parameter  
Standard value  
HITACHI  
HITACHI  
HITACHI  
HITACHI  
HTS541040G9 HTS541060G9 HTS541080G9 HTS541010G9  
SA00  
SA00  
SA00  
SA00  
69.85  
9.5  
Width (mm)  
Height (mm)  
Depth (mm)  
Weight (g)  
Outlin  
e
dimen  
sions  
100.0  
97/ 98 (max.)  
101/102(max.) 101/102(max.) 101/102(max.)  
Parameter  
Standard value  
HITACHI  
HITACHI  
HITACHI  
HTS721060G9AT00  
HTS721080G9AT00  
HTS721010G9AT00  
69.85  
9.5  
Width (mm)  
Height(mm)  
Depth (mm)  
Weight (g)  
Outline  
dimensi  
ons  
100.2  
115 Max  
Table 1-2 2.5-inch HDD specifications  
Specification  
Toshiba  
Toshiba  
Toshiba  
Toshiba  
Toshiba  
Parameter  
MHV2100 MK1032G  
MK8032G MK6032G MK4032GS  
BH  
SX  
SX  
SX  
X
Storage size (formatted)  
Speed (RPM)  
120GB  
100GB  
80GB  
60GB  
40 GB  
5,400  
Data transfer speed  
(Mbits/s)  
236-456  
218-419  
Interface transfer rate (MB/s)  
Storage density (Kbpi)  
Track density (Ktpi)  
150 (Ultra DMA Mode)  
-
-
433-  
393.7  
Average random seek time  
(read) (ms)  
12  
-
Average random seek time  
(write) (ms)  
Power-on-to-ready (sec)  
4 (typical)/10 sec (Max)  
12  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview  
Specification  
FUJITSU  
Parameter  
FUJITSU  
FUJITSU  
FUJITSU  
FUJITSU  
FUJITSU  
MHV2120B MHV2100B MHV2080B MHV2060B MHV2040B MHV2160BT  
H
H
H
H
H
Storage size  
(formatted)  
120GB  
100GB  
80GB  
60GB  
40GB  
160GB  
Speed (RPM)  
5,400  
4,200  
Data transfer speed  
(Mbits/s)  
236.1~ 465.0  
218~ 429  
218~ 429  
218~ 429  
150 (Max).  
bus transfer rate  
(MB/s)  
150 ATA7/SERIAL ATA1.0a/Serial ATAII 1.2 interface support  
8MB  
Buffer Size  
Number of Sectors  
-
195,371,568 117,210,240 156,301,488 78,140,160  
312,581,808  
7.14  
Average random  
seek time (read)  
(ms)  
12  
5.56  
Average random  
seek time  
(write) (ms)  
Power-on-to-ready  
(sec)  
3.5/ 10 (max.)  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview  
Specification  
Parameter  
HITACHI  
HITACHI  
HITACHI  
HITACHI  
HTS541040G9SA HTS541040G9S HTS541040G9 HTS541040G9S  
00  
A00  
SA00  
A00  
Storage size (formatted)  
Speed (RPM)  
40GB  
60GB  
80GB  
100GB  
5,400  
493  
Data transfer  
493  
493  
493  
speed(Mbits/s)  
bus transfer rate (MB/s)  
150 ATA7/SERIAL ATA1.0a/Serial ATAII 1.2 interface  
support  
Buffer Size  
8192  
8192  
8192  
16384  
195,371,568  
156,301,488  
117,210,240  
78,140,160  
Track /mm density (TPI)  
Average random seek time  
(read) (ms)  
12  
5.55  
Average random seek time  
(write) (ms)  
Power-on-to-ready (sec)  
4 (typ.) / 10 (max.)  
14  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview  
Specification  
Parameter  
HITACHI  
HITACHI  
HITACHI  
HTS721060G9AT00  
HTS721080G9AT00  
HTS721010G9AT00  
Storage size (formatted)  
Speed (RPM)  
60GB  
80GB  
100GB  
7,200  
267-629  
Data transfer  
speed(Mbits/s)  
bus transfer rate (MB/s)  
Buffer Size  
150 ATA7/SERIAL ATA1.0a/Serial ATAII 1.2 interface support  
16385  
16385  
16385  
117,210,240  
156,301,488  
195,371,568  
Track /mm density (TPI)  
Average random seek  
time (read) (ms)  
10  
11  
4
Average random seek time  
(write) (ms)  
Power-on-to-ready (sec)  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview  
1.4 Optical Drive  
1.4.1 DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW Drive  
The DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW drive accommodates either 12 cm (4.72-inch) or 8 cm (3.15-  
inch) CD/DVD-ROM and CD-R/RW. It is a high-performance drive that reads DVD at  
maximum 8-speed and CD at maximum 24-speed.  
The DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW drive is shown in Figure 1-4. The dimensions and  
specifications of the DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW drive are described in Table 1-3, Table 1-4.  
Figure 1-4 DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW drive  
Table 1-3 DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW drive outline dimensions  
Parameter  
Standard value  
MATSUSHITA  
(UJDA770TT-A)  
HLDS  
(GCC-4244N.ATAKN0)  
TSST  
(TS-L462C/TOHJ.I,)  
Maker  
Width (mm)  
128  
12.7 (excluding projections)  
127  
Outline  
Height (mm)  
Depth (mm)  
Mass (g)  
dimensions  
129  
127  
180±10g  
160±10g  
180g  
16  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview  
Table 1-4 DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW drive specifications (1/3)  
Drive Specification  
Parameter  
MATSUSHITA (UJDA770TT-A)  
DVD-ROM MAX 8X CAV (MAX 10800 KB/s)  
CD-ROM MAX 24X CAV (MAX 3600 KB/s)  
Read (KB/s)  
CD-R  
4X , 8X (CLV), 16XZCLV, MAX. 24X(CAV)  
CD-RW 4X (CLV)  
High Speed CD-RW 4X, 8X, 10X (CLV)  
Ultra Speed CD-RW 8X, 10X (CLV), MAX. 24X (CAV)  
Data transfer  
speed  
Write  
16.6 MB/s :PIO mode4  
16.6 MB/s :Multi word mode2  
ATAPI interface  
(MB/s)  
33.3 MB/s :Ultra DMA mode2  
CD-ROM  
130ms  
180ms  
2MB  
Access time  
(ms) (Random)  
DVD-ROM  
Buffer memory  
CD-DA, CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW  
CD-ROM XA , Disc.  
PhotoCD(Muilti Session)  
Video CD,CD-Extra(CD+),CD-text  
CD  
Supported disk  
format  
DVD-ROM, DVD-Video  
DVD-RAM(2.6GB/4.7GB)  
DVD-R, DVD-RW (Ver. 1.1)  
(Supporting Multi Border)  
DVD+R, DVD+RW  
DVD  
(Supporting Multi Session)  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview  
Table 1-4 DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW drive specifications (2/3)  
Drive Specification  
Parameter  
HLDS (GCC-4244N.ATAKN0)  
DVD-ROM  
Single Layer3.3x -8x (CAV):Approx. 4,710 r/min  
Dual Layer3.3x -8x (CAV): Approx. 5,180 r/min  
DVD-Video  
1.7x -4x (CAV): Approx. 2,600r/min  
DVD-R  
3.95GB1.7x -4x (CAV): Approx. 2,600 r/min  
4.7GB1.7x -4x (CAV): Approx. 2,360 r/min  
DVD-RW  
4.7GB 1.7x -4x (CAV): Approx. 2,360 r/min  
DVD-RAM  
2.6GB2x (ZCLV): Approx. 2,120 -4,700 r/min  
4.7GB2x (ZCLV): Approx. 1,400 -3,230 r/min  
DVD+R  
Read (KB/s)  
Single Layer1.7x -4x (CAV): Approx. 2,360 r/min  
Double Layer1.7x -4x (CAV): Approx. 2,360 r/min  
DVD+RW  
1.7x -4x (CAV): Approx. 2,360 r/min  
CD-ROM  
10.3x -24x (CAV): Approx. 4,860 -5,670 r/min  
CD-R  
10.3x -24x (CAV): Approx. 4,860 -5,200 r/min-  
CD-RW  
Data transfer  
speed  
10.3x -24x (CAV): Approx. 4,860 -5,200 r/min  
CD-R  
4xCLV, 10xCLV, 10-16xPCAV, 24xMAX.CAV  
CD-RW  
Normal Disc4xCLV  
High speed Disc4x, 10xCLV  
Ultra speed Disc10xCLV, 10-16xPCAV, 24xMAX.CAV  
Rotational Speed (CD-R/RW)4xCLV:  
Approx. 800 -2,020 r/min10xCLV:  
Approx. 2,000-5,050 r/min24xMAX.CAV:  
Approx. 4,860 -5,200 r/min  
Write  
33.3 Mbytes/s max. (Ultra DMA Mode 2)  
16.6 Mbytes/s max. (DMA MW Mode 2)  
16.6 Mbytes/s max. (PIO Mode 4)  
ATAPI interface  
(MB/s)  
CD-ROM  
110ms (typ.)  
120ms (typ.)  
2MB  
Access time  
(ms) (Random)  
DVD-ROM  
Buffer memory  
18  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview  
CD-ROM Mode1&2S  
CD  
CD-ROM XA Modo2 (Form1&2)  
CD-DA, CD-I, CD-Extra/CD-Plus, Video-CD  
DVD-ROM  
DVD Video  
Supported disk  
format  
DVD-R (General, Authoring)  
DVD-RW (Single/Multi-boarder, Packet)  
DVD-RAM  
DVD  
DVD+R/RW  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview  
Table 1-4 DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW drive specifications (3/3)  
Drive Specification  
Parameter  
TSST (TS-L462C/TOHJ,I.)  
CD-ROM Max. 24X (3,600 KB/sec) CAV 24X  
CD-RW  
Max. 24X (3,600 KB/sec) CAV 24X  
DVD-Single Max 8X (10,800 KB/sec)  
DVD-Dual Max 6 (10,800 KB/sec)  
Read (KB/s)  
CD-R Max. 24X (3,600 KB/sec)  
P-CAV 24X/20X/16X CLV 0X/8X/4X  
CD-RW Max. 4X (600 KB/sec) CLV 4X  
HS CD-RW Max. 10X (1,500 KB/sec) CLV 10X  
US CD-RW Max. 24X (3,600 KB/sec) P-CAV 24X/16X  
Data transfer  
speed  
Write  
PIO Mode4 Max 16.6 MB/sec  
DMA Multiword Mode2 Max 16.6 MB/sec  
ULTRA DMA Mode2 Max 33.2 MB/sec  
ATAPI interface  
(MB/s)  
CD-ROM  
130ms (typ.)  
150ms (typ.)  
2MB  
Access time  
(ms) (Random)  
DVD-ROM  
Buffer memory  
CD-DA (Red Book) - Standard Audio CD & CD-TEXT  
CD-ROM (Yellow Book Mode1 & 2) - Standard Data  
CD-ROM XA (Mode2 Form1 & 2) - Photo CD, Multi-  
Session  
CD-I (Green Book, Mode2 Form1 & 2, Ready, Bridge)  
CD-Extra/ CD-Plus (Blue Book) - Audio & Text/Video  
Video-CD (White Book) - MPEG1 Video  
CD-R (Orange Book Part II)  
CD  
CD-RW & HSRW (Orange Book Part III Volume1 &  
Volume2)  
Super Audio CD (SACD) Hybrid type  
US & US+ RW  
Supported disk  
format  
DVD-ROM (Book 1.02), DVD-Dual  
DVD-Video (Book 1.1)  
DVD-R (Book 1.0, 3.9G)  
DVD-R (Book 2.0, 4.7G) - General & Authoring  
DVD+R (Version 1.0), DVD+R DL  
DVD+RW  
DVD  
DVD-RW (Non CPRM & CPRM)  
20  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview  
1.4.2 DVD Super Multi Drive  
The DVD Super Multi drive accommodates either 12 cm (4.72-inch) or 8 cm (3.15-inch)  
CD/DVD-ROM, CD-R/RW, DVD±R/±RW and DVD-RAM. It is a high-performance drive  
that reads DVD-ROM at maximum 8-speed and CD at maximum 24-speed. Write speed of  
DVD±R/±RW and DVD-RAM is different depending on the drive.  
The DVD Super Multi drive is shown in Figure 1-5. The dimensions and specifications of the  
DVD Super Multi drive are described in Table 1-5, Table 1-8.  
Figure 1-5 DVD Super Multi drive  
Table 1-5 DVD Super Multi drive outline dimensions  
Parameter  
Maker  
Standard value  
HLDS  
Panasonic  
UJ-850BTJV-A  
Pioneer  
TEAC  
DV-W28EA  
GMA-4082N-ATAKK0  
DVR-K16TBS  
Width  
(mm)  
128  
Outline  
Dimensi  
ons  
Height  
(mm)  
12.7  
Depth  
(mm)  
129.0  
127  
127  
129.4  
Mass (g)  
190±10g  
185±7g  
190±10g  
190±10g  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview  
Table 1-6 DVD Super Multi drive specifications (1/4)  
Drive Specification  
Parameter  
Panasonic (UJ-850BTJV-A)  
DVD-ROM  
MAX 8X CAV (MAX 10800 KB/s)  
CD-ROM  
MAX 24X CAV (MAX 3600 KB/s)  
Read(KB/s)  
CD-R 4X , 8X (CLV) , MAX. 12x, 16x, 24X (ZCLV)  
CD-RW 4X (CLV)  
HS-RW 4X, 8X, 10X (CLV)  
US-RW 8x, 10X (CLV) ,Max.16X  
DVD-R 1X, 2X (CLV), MAX.4x, 6x, 8X (ZCLV)  
DVD-R DL 2X (CLV) ,MAX.4X ZCLV)  
DVD-RW 1X, 2X (CLV), MAX.6X (ZCLV)  
DVD+R 2.4X (CLV), MAX.4x, 6x, 8X (ZCLV)  
Data transfer  
speed  
Write  
DVD+R DL 2.4X (CLV) ,MAX.4X ZCLV)  
DVD+RW 2.4X (CLV), MAX.4x, 6x ZCLV), 8X (CAV)  
DVD-RAM 2X, 3X,3X-5X (ZCLV)  
8cm media 2X CLV)  
PIO mode  
16.6 MB/s :PIO mode4  
DMA mode  
16.6 MB/s :Multi word mode2  
ATAPI interface  
(MB/s)  
Ultra DMA mode 33.3 MB/s :Ultra DMA mode2  
CD-ROM  
150 (Random)  
180 (Random)  
Access time  
(ms)  
DVD-ROM  
Buffer memory  
2MB  
CD-DA,CD-ROM,CD-ROM XA  
Photo CD (Multi-Session)  
Video CD, CD-Extra(CD+),CD-text  
Hybrid SACD  
CD  
Supported disk  
format  
DVD-VIDEO, DVD-ROM,  
DVD-R(3.9GB, 4.7GB), DVD-R DL DVD-R:3.9GB Read  
Only  
DVD  
DVD-RW(Ver.1.1) , DVD-RAM DVD-RAM:2.6GB:Read  
Only  
DVD+R, DVD+R DL, DVD+RW  
22  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview  
Table 1-2 DVD Super Multi drive specifications (2/4)  
Drive Specification  
Parameter  
HLDS (GSA-4082N.ATAKN0)  
DVD-R/RW/ROM 8x/8x/8x max.  
DVD-RAM (Ver.1.0)2x  
(Ver.2.2)2x, 3x, 5x  
DVD-Video  
(CSSCompliant Disc)4x max.(Single/Dual layer)  
Read(KB/s)  
DVD+R/+RW  
DVD+R  
8x/8xmax.  
DL4xmax.  
CD-R/RW/ROM 24x/24x/24x max.  
CD-DA  
(DAE) 20x max.  
DVD-R  
DVD-R  
2x CLV, 4x ZCLV, 8x CAV  
DL2x CLV  
DVD-RW 1x, 2x CLV, 4x ZCLV  
DVD-RAM 2x, 3x ZCLV, 5x PCAV(Ver.2.2)  
Data transfer  
speed  
DVD+R  
DVD+R  
2.4x CLV, 4x ZCLV, 8x PCAV  
DL2.4x CLV  
Write  
DVD+RW 2.4x, 3x CLV, 4xZCLV  
CD-R  
CD-RW  
10x CLV, 16x, 24x ZCLV  
4x, 10x CLV  
(High Speed: 10x )  
( Ultra Speed and Ultra Speed Plus: 10x )  
33.3 Mbytes/s max. (Ultra DMA Mode 2)  
16.6 Mbytes/s max. (DMA MW Mode 2)  
16.6 Mbytes/s max. (PIO Mode 4)  
ATAPI interface  
(MB/s)  
CD-ROM  
140 (Random)  
160 (Random)  
2MB  
Access time  
(ms)  
DVD-ROM  
Buffer memory  
CD-ROM, CD-ROM XA, CD-I, Video CD, CD-Extra and  
CD-Text, Photo CD (Single and Multi session), CD-DA  
Super Audio CD (Compatible layer in Hybrid type)  
CD-R discs conforming to “Orange Book Part 2  
CD-RW discs conforming to “Orange Book Part 3  
CD  
Supported disk  
format  
DVD-ROM, DVD-R(Ver.1.0, Ver. 2.0 for Authoring) ,  
DVD-RAM(Ver.1.0) DVD-R(Ver. 2.1 for General),  
DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, DVD-RAM(Ver.2.2),DVD+R(SL/DL)  
and DVD+RW  
DVD  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview  
Table 1-6 DVD Super Multi drive specifications (3/4)  
Drive Specification  
Parameter  
Pioneer(DVR-K16TBA)  
8X CAV at DVD-ROM (Single Layer),DVD-R/ RW  
and +R / RW  
6X CAV at DVD-ROM (Dual-Layer), DVD-R DL and +R DL  
5X Zone CLV at DVD-RAM  
Read(KB/s)  
24XCAV at CD-ROM andCD-R/ RW  
8X Zone CLV at DVD-R / +R and +RW  
6X Zone CLV at DVD-RW  
5X Zone CLV at DVD-RAM  
Data transfer  
4X Zone CLV at DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) and +R DL (Double  
Layer)  
speed  
Write  
24X Zone CLV at CD-R / RW  
SFF-8020,SFF-8090 Ver.5  
IDE Data Transfer Mode PIO Mode 4,  
Multi Word DMA Mode 2,  
UltraDMA Mode2  
ATAPI interface  
(MB/s)  
)
CD-ROM  
130 (Random)  
150 (Random)  
2MB  
Access time  
(ms)  
DVD-ROM  
Buffer memory  
KODAK Photo CD Single and Multi-session  
CD Extra (CD PLUS)  
Video CD  
CD text data (Read / Write)  
CD-R discs (Read/ Write)  
CD-RW discs (Read/ Write)  
CD  
DVD-ROM  
Supported disk  
format  
DVD-R Ver.2.00 for General(Read/ Write)  
DVD-R DL Ver.3.0 (Read/Write)  
DVD-RW Ver.1.0 &1.1 &1.2(Read/ Write)  
DVD+R Ver.1.0 & 1.11& 1.2 (Read/Write)  
DVD+RDL Ver1.0(Read / Write)  
DVD+RW Ver.1.1& 1.2 (Read/Write)  
DVD+RW high speed Ver.1.0 (Read/Write)  
DVD-RAM Ver.2.0 &2.1 (Read/ Write)  
DVD  
24  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview  
Table 1-6 DVD Super Multi drive specifications (4/4)  
Drive Specification  
TEAC (DV-W28EA)  
Parameter  
8X CAV at DVD-ROM (Single Layer),DVD-R/ +R  
4X CAV at DVD-RW/ +RW  
4X CAV at DVD+R (Dual Layer), DVD-R DL and +R DL  
3X-5X Zone CLV at DVD-RAM  
24XCAV at CD-ROM  
Read(KB/s)  
20XCAV at CD-R/ RW  
CD-R 10-24X (ZCLV),10X(CLV),4X(CLV)  
CD-RW 10X(CLV)  
Data transfer  
DVD-R 2-8X (ZCLV),2X(CLV),1X ( CLV)  
DVD-RW 2-4X (ZCLV), 2X(CLV),1X ( CLV)  
DVD-RAM 35X (ZCLV),2.4X(CLV)  
DVD+R 2.4-8X ( ZCLV),2.4X( CLV)  
DVD+R( Double layer) 2.4( CLV )  
DVD+RW 2.4-4X ( ZCLV ),2.4X ( CLV )  
SFF-8020,SFF-8090 Ver.5  
speed  
Write  
IDE Data Transfer Mode PIO Mode 4,  
Multi Word DMA Mode 2,  
UltraDMA Mode2  
ATAPI interface  
(MB/s)  
CD-ROM  
130 (Random)  
130 (Random)  
2MB  
Access time  
(ms)  
DVD-ROM  
Buffer memory  
CD-DA  
CD-ROM Mode 1,Mode 2  
CD-ROM XA Mode2 ( Form 1, Form 2)  
Photo CD (signal/multi-session)  
Enhanced CD, CD-tEXT  
CD  
Supported disk  
format  
DVD-ROM  
DVD-R (General .Authoring )  
DVD-RW  
DVD  
DVD-Video  
DVD-RAM ( 4.7G,2.6GB)  
DVD+R,DVD+R ( Double layer),DVD+RW  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview  
26  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview  
1.5 Keyboard  
The Satellite P100 comes with a "desktop-style" keyboard built into it. This means it is full-  
sized and features a full set of numeric function keys (also known as calculator keys) on the  
right-hand side. Unlike other notebooks computers with smaller keyboards, there is no  
'Numeric Mode' or any numeric keyboard overlay.  
Figure 1-6 is a view of the keyboard.  
Figure 1-6 Keyboard  
See Appendix E for details of the keyboard layout.  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview  
1.6 TFT Color Display  
The TFT color display is 17.1 inch and consists of LCD module and FL inverter board.  
1.6.1 LCD Module  
The LCD module used for the TFT color display uses a backlight as the light source and can  
display with 1,440x 900 dots (WXGA+) or 1,680x1,050 dots(WSXGA+) resolution.  
Figure 1-7 shows a view of the LCD module and Table 1-8 lists the specifications.  
Figure 1-7 LCD Module  
Table 1-7 LCD module specifications  
Specifications(WSXGA+)  
Specifications(WXGA+)  
LG-Philips Samsung  
LTN170WX- B170PW0  
LG-Philips  
Samsung  
AU  
Item  
LP171WE02-  
TL05  
LTN170WP-  
L02-E  
LP171WX2-  
A4K7  
L05-E  
3 V1  
Number of Dots  
1,680x1,050  
1,440x 900  
Dot spacing (mm)  
0.297(H)× 0.297(V)  
28  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview  
1.6.2 FL Inverter Board  
The FL inverter board supplies a high frequency current to illuminate the LCD module FL.  
Table 1-10 lists the FL inverter board specifications.  
Table 1-8 FL inverter board specifications  
Specifications  
Item  
PI  
FL9030  
SUMIDA  
IV002  
Input  
Voltage (V)  
8 ~ 20  
1500  
7.5 ~ 21  
Power (W)  
5
6
Voltage (Vrms)  
1500 ~ 1900  
Output  
Current (f=55KHz)  
(mArms)  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview  
1.7 Power Supply  
The power supply supplies 23 different voltages to the system board.  
The power supply microcontroller has the following functions.  
1. Judges if the DC power supply (AC adapter) is connected to the computer.  
2. Detects DC output and circuit malfunctions.  
3. Controls the battery icon, and DC IN icon.  
4. Turns the battery charging system on and off and detects a fully charged battery.  
5. Turns the power supply on and off.  
6. Provides more accurate detection of a low battery.  
7. Calculates the remaining battery capacity.  
8. Controls the transmission of the status signal of the main battery.  
Table 1-9 lists the power supply output specifications.  
30  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview  
Table 1-9 Power supply output rating  
Power supply Yes/No)  
Name  
Voltage  
[V]  
Power OFF  
Suspend mode  
Power OFF  
Boot mode  
No  
Battery  
Object  
1.484 -  
0.748  
VCC_CORE  
No  
No  
No  
CPU  
VTT  
1.05  
1.8  
1.2  
0.9  
1.8  
1.8  
5
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
CPU, 915GM, ICH4-M  
CPU, 915GM,ICH4-M  
915GM,ICH4-M  
DDR2-SDRAM  
RC410MB, DDR2-SDRAM  
SB400  
+1.8V  
+1.5V  
No  
+0.9V  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
+1.8VSUS  
+1.5V_S5  
USBPWR0  
USBPWR1  
USBPWR2  
AVDD  
USB  
5
USB  
5
USB  
5
MAX9750  
Clock Generator,  
Thermal Sensor, Mini-PCI,  
SDRAM(SPD), 915GM, SB400,  
FWH, LAN, LCD, PCMCIA, EC,  
LED, Audio Codec  
+3V  
3.3  
No  
No  
No  
Mini-PCI, HDD, ODD, TP,  
CRT, PCMCIA, FAN  
+5V  
5
No  
No  
No  
3VSUS  
5VSUS  
3V_S5  
3.3  
5
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
NO  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Card Cont, Mini-PCI, MDC  
PC-Card, USB  
ICH4-M  
3.3  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
NO  
No  
3VPCU  
VCCRTC  
+2.5V  
3
No  
EC/KBC, System LED  
ICH4-M (RTC)  
915GM  
2.0 -3.6  
2.5  
Yes  
NO  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview  
1.8 Batteries  
The PC has the following two batteries.  
θ Main battery  
θ Real time clock (RTC) battery  
Table 1-10 lists the specifications for these two batteries.  
Table 1-10 Battery specifications  
Battery Name  
Sanyo  
Battery Element Output Voltage  
Capacity  
10.8v  
6000mAh  
9 cell  
Sanyo  
6 Cells  
Main battery  
Lithium ion  
Lithium ion  
10.8v  
3V  
4000mAh  
16mAh  
Real time clock  
(RTC) battery  
693013  
1.8.1 Main Battery  
The main battery is the primary power supply for the computer when the AC adapter is not  
connected. In Standby, the main battery maintains the current status of the computer.  
32  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview  
1.8.2 Battery Charging Control  
Battery charging is controlled by a power supply microprocessor. The power supply  
microprocessor controls power supply and detects a full charge when the AC adaptor and  
battery are connected to the computer.  
θ Battery Charge  
When the AC adapter is connected, normal charging is used while the system is  
turned on and quick charge is used while the system is turned off. Refer to the  
following Table 1-11.  
Table 1-11 Time required for charges of main battery  
Condition  
Charging Time  
About 6 hours  
About 3 hours  
Power On Charge  
Power Off Charge  
Charge is stopped in the following cases.  
1. The main battery is fully charged  
2. The main battery is removed  
3. Main battery or AC adapter voltage is abnormal  
4. Charging current is abnormal  
θ Data preservation time  
When turning off the power in being charged fully, the preservation time is as  
following Table 1-12.  
Table 1-12 Data preservation time  
Condition  
preservation time  
About 3 days  
Standby  
Hibernation  
About 1 month  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview  
1.8.3 RTC Battery  
The RTC battery provides the power supply to maintain the date, time, and other system  
information in memory.  
Table 1-13 lists the Time required for charges of RTC battery and data preservation time.  
Table 1-13 Time required for charges of RTC battery  
Condition  
Power ON (Lights Power LED)  
Data preservation tome (Full-charged)  
Time  
About 24 hours  
About a month  
34  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview  
1.9 AC Adapter  
The AC adapter is used to charge the battery.  
Table 1-14 lists the AC adapter specifications.  
Table 1-14 AC adapter specifications  
Parameter  
With Led  
Specification  
DELTA/ LITE-ON  
DELTA/ LITE-ON  
DELTA/LITE-ON  
Power  
75W  
90W  
120W  
Input voltage  
Input frequency  
Input current  
AC 100V/240V  
AC 100V/240V  
50Hz/60Hz  
AC 100V/240V  
1.5A  
1.8A  
1.8A  
Output voltage  
Output current  
DC 15V  
6A  
5A  
8A  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
Troubleshooting Procedures  
2-1  
[CONFIDENTIAL]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
2-2  
[CONFIDENTIAL]  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
Contents  
2.1  
2.2  
2.3  
Troubleshooting.............................................................................................................1  
Troubleshooting Flowchart............................................................................................3  
Power Supply Troubleshooting......................................................................................7  
Procedure 1  
Procedure 2  
Procedure 3  
Procedure 4  
Power Status Check ...................................................................7  
Error Code Check ......................................................................9  
Connection Check....................................................................10  
Charging Check .......................................................................10  
Procedure 5  
Replacement Check ................................................................ 12  
2.4  
System Board Troubleshooting................................................................................... 13  
Procedure 1  
Procedure 2  
Message Check ....................................................................... 14  
Debugging Port Check............................................................ 16  
Procedure 3  
Procedure 4  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check.............................21  
Replacement Check .................................................................21  
2.5  
2.6  
USB FDD Troubleshooting .........................................................................................22  
Procedure 1  
Procedure 2  
Procedure 3  
FDD Head Cleaning Check .....................................................22  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check.............................23  
Connector Check and Replacement Check..............................24  
2.5” HDD Troubleshooting..........................................................................................26  
Procedure 1  
Procedure 2  
Procedure 3  
Procedure 4  
Procedure 5  
Partition Check.........................................................................26  
Message Check ........................................................................27  
Format Check...........................................................................28  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check.............................29  
Connector Check and Replacement Check..............................30  
2.7  
2.8  
Keyboard Troubleshooting ..........................................................................................31  
Procedure 1  
Procedure 2  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check.............................31  
Connector Check and Replacement Check..............................32  
Touch pad Troubleshooting.........................................................................................33  
Procedure 1  
Procedure 2  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check.............................33  
Connector Check and Replacement Check..............................34  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-4  
[CONFIDENTIAL]  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.9  
Display Troubleshooting..............................................................................................35  
Procedure 1  
Procedure 2  
Procedure 3  
Procedure 4  
External Monitor Check...........................................................35  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check.............................35  
Connector and Cable Check.....................................................36  
Replacement Check .................................................................37  
2.10 Optical Disk Drive Troubleshooting............................................................................38  
Procedure 1  
Procedure 2  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check.............................38  
Connector Check and Replacement Check..............................38  
2.11 Modem Troubleshooting..............................................................................................39  
Procedure 1  
Procedure 2  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check.............................39  
Connector Check and Replacement Check..............................39  
2.12 LAN Troubleshooting..................................................................................................41  
Procedure 1  
Procedure 2  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check.............................41  
Connector Check and Replacement Check..............................41  
2.13 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting...................................................................................42  
Procedure 1  
Procedure 2  
Procedure 3  
Transmitting-Receiving Check................................................42  
Antennas' Connection Check...................................................43  
Replacement Check .................................................................44  
2.14 Sound Troubleshooting................................................................................................45  
Procedure 1  
Procedure 2  
Procedure 3  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check.............................45  
Connector Check......................................................................45  
Replacement Check .................................................................46  
2.15 VGA Troubleshooting..................................................................................................47  
Procedure 1  
Procedure 2  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check.............................47  
Connector Check and Replacement Check.............................47  
2.16 Fingerprint Troubleshooting........................................................................................49  
Procedure 1  
Procedure 2  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check.............................49  
Connector Check and Replacement Check.............................49  
2.17 Bluetooth Troubleshooting ..........................................................................................50  
Procedure 1  
Procedure 2  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check.............................50  
Connector Check and Replacement Check.............................50  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-6  
[CONFIDENTIAL]  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2
2.1 Troubleshooting  
Chapter 2 describes how to determine which Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) in the computer  
is causing the computer to malfunction.  
The FRUs covered are:  
1. Power supply  
2. System Board  
3. USB FDD  
4. 2.5” HDD  
6. Touch pad  
7. Display  
11. Wireless LAN  
12. Sound  
13, VGA Board  
14, Finger Print Board  
15, Bluetooth  
8. Optical Disk Drive  
9. Modem  
5. Keyboard  
10. LAN  
The Test Program operations are described in Chapter 3. Detailed replacement procedures are  
described in Chapter 4.  
NOTE: After replacing the system board or CPU, it is necessary to execute the subtest 01  
initial configuration of the 3.3 Setting of the hardware configuration in Chapter 3.  
Also update with the latest BIOS as described in Appendix G “BIOS Rewrite  
Procedures”  
After replacing the LCD, update with the latest EC/KBC as described in  
Appendix H “EC/KBC Rewrite Procedures” to set the SVP parameter.  
The implement for the Diagnostics procedures is referred to Chapter 3. Also, following  
implements are necessary:  
1. Phillips screwdrivers (For replacement procedures)  
2. Implements for debugging port check  
Toshiba MS-DOS system FD  
RS-232C cross cable  
Test board with debug port test cable  
PC for displaying debug port test result  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
There are following two types of connections in the figure of board and module connection in  
and after 2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting.  
(1) Cable connection is described in the figure as line.  
(2) Pin connection is described in the figure as arrow.  
<e.g.> Connection of modem  
2
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.2 Troubleshooting Flowchart  
Use the flowchart in Figure 2-1 as a guide for determining which troubleshooting procedures  
to execute. Before going through the flowchart steps, verify the following:  
Ask him or her to enter the password if a password is registered.  
Verify with the customer that Toshiba Windows is installed on the hard disk. Non-  
Windows operating systems can cause the computer to malfunction.  
Make sure all optional equipment is removed from the computer.  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Figure 2-1 Troubleshooting flowchart (1/2)  
4
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Figure 2-1 Troubleshooting flowchart (2/2)  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
If the diagnostics program cannot detect an error, the problem may be intermittent. The Test  
program should be executed several times to isolate the problem. Check the Log Utilities  
function to confirm which diagnostic test detected an error(s), and then perform the  
appropriate troubleshooting procedures as follows:  
1. If an error is detected on the system test, memory test, display test, CD-ROM/DVD-  
ROM test, expansion test, real timer test, sound test or Modem/LAN/Bluetooth  
/IEEE1394 test, perform the System Board Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.4.  
2. If an error is detected on the floppy disk test, perform the USB FDD Troubleshooting  
Procedures in Section 2.5.  
3. If an error is detected on the hard disk test, perform the HDD Troubleshooting  
Procedures in Section 2.6.  
4. If an error is found on the keyboard test (DIAGNOSTICS TEST) and pressed key  
display test (ONLY ONE TEST), perform the Keyboard Troubleshooting Procedures  
in Section 2.7.  
5. If an error is found on the touch pad test (ONLY ONE TEST), perform the touch pad  
Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.8.  
6. If an error is detected on the display test, perform the Display Troubleshooting  
Procedures in Section 2.9.  
7. If an error is detected on the CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test, perform the Optical Disk  
Drive Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.10.  
8. If an error is detected on the modem test, perform the Modem Troubleshooting  
Procedures in Section 2.11.  
9. If an error is detected on the LAN test, perform the LAN Troubleshooting Procedures  
in Section 2.12.  
10. If an error is detected on the wireless LAN test, perform the Wireless LAN  
Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.13.  
11. If an error is detected on the sound test, perform the Sound Troubleshooting  
Procedures in Section 2.14.  
12. If an error is detected on the VGA daughter card test, perform the VGA  
Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.15.  
13. If an error is detected on the fingerprint test, perform the fingerprint Troubleshooting  
Procedures in Section 2.16.  
14. If an error is detected on the Bluetooth test, perform the Bluetooth Troubleshooting  
Procedures in Section 2.17.  
6
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting  
The power supply controller controls many functions and components. To determine if the  
power supply is functioning properly, start with Procedure 1 and continue with the other  
Procedures as instructed. The procedures described in this section are:  
Procedure 1: Power Status Check  
Procedure 2: Error Code Check  
Procedure 3: Connection Check  
Procedure 4: Charging Check  
Procedure 5: Replacement Check  
Procedure 1  
Power Status Check  
The following LED indicates the power supply status:  
Battery LED  
DC IN LED  
The Power Supply control displays the power supply status with the Battery LED and the DC  
IN LED as listed in the tables below.  
Table 2-1 Battery icon  
Battery icon  
Power supply status  
Lights orange  
Battery is charged and the external DC is input. It has no  
relation with ON/OFF of the system power.  
Lights green  
Battery is fully charged and the external DC is input. It has  
no relation with ON/OFF of the system power.  
Blinks orange  
The battery level is low while the system power is ON.  
(even intervals)  
Blinks orange once  
(at being switched on)  
The system is driven by only a battery and the battery level  
is low.  
Doesn’t light  
Any condition other than those above.  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Table 2-2 DC IN icon  
DC IN icon  
Lights green  
Blinks orange  
Doesn’t light  
Power supply status  
DC power is being supplied from the AC adapter.  
Power supply malfunction*1  
Any condition other than those above.  
*1 When the power supply controller detects a malfunction, the DC IN icon blinks  
orange. It shows an error code.  
When the icon is blinking, perform the following procedure.  
1. Remove the battery pack and the AC adapter.  
2. Re-attach the battery pack and the AC adapter.  
If the icon is still blinking after the operation above, check the followings:  
Check 1 If the DC IN icon blinks orange, go to Procedure 2.  
Check 2 If the DC IN icon does not light, go to Procedure 3.  
Check 3 If the battery icon does not light orange or green, go to Procedure 4.  
NOTE: Use a supplied AC adapter.  
8
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Procedure 2  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Procedure 3  
Connection Check  
The wiring diagram related to the power supply is shown below:  
Any of the connectors may be disconnected. Perform Check 1.  
Check 1 Make sure the AC adapter and the AC power cord is firmly plugged into the DC  
IN socket (CN21/34) and wall outlet. If these cables are connected firmly, go to  
Check 2.  
Check 2 Replace the AC adapter and the AC power cord with new ones.  
If the DC IN icon does not light, go to Procedure 5.  
If the battery icon does not light, go to Check 3.  
Check 3 Make sure the battery pack is installed in the computer correctly. If the battery is  
properly installed and the battery icon still does not light, go to Procedure 4.  
Procedure 4  
Charging Check  
Check if the power supply controller charges the battery pack properly. Perform the  
following procedures:  
Check 1 Make sure the AC adapter is firmly plugged into the DC IN socket (W8800).  
Check 2 Make sure the battery pack is properly installed. If it is properly installed, go to  
Check 3.  
Check 3 The battery pack may be completely discharged. Wait a few minutes to charge the  
battery pack while connecting the battery pack and the AC adapter. If the battery  
pack is still not charged, go to Check 4.  
10  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Check 4 The battery’s temperature is too high or low. Leave the battery for a while to  
adjust it in the right temperature. If the battery pack is still not charged, go to  
Check 5.  
Check 5 Replace the battery pack with a new one. If the battery pack is still not charged,  
go to Procedure 5.  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Procedure 5  
Replacement Check  
The power is supplied to the system board by the AC adapter. If either the AC adapter or the  
system board was damaged, perform the following Checks.  
To disassemble the computer, follow the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement  
Procedures.  
When AC adapter is connected;  
Check 1 AC adapter may be faulty. Replace the AC adapter with a new one. If the problem  
still occurs, perform Check 2.  
Check 2 System board may be faulty. Replace the system board with a new one.  
When AC adapter is not connected ;  
(When driving with battery pack)  
Check 1 Battery pack may be faulty. Replace it with a new one. If the problem still occurs,  
perform Check 2.  
Check 2 System board may be faulty. Replace it with a new one.  
12  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting  
This section describes how to determine if the system board is malfunctioning or not. Start  
with Procedure 1 and continue with the other procedures as instructed. The procedures  
described in this section are:  
Procedure 1: Message Check  
Procedure 2: Debugging Port Check  
Procedure 3: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check  
Procedure 4: Replacement Check  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Procedure 1  
Message Check  
When the power is turned on, the system performs the Power On Self Test (POST) installed  
in the BIOS ROM. The POST tests each IC on the system board and initializes it.  
If an error message is shown on the display, perform Check 1.  
If there is no error message, go to Procedure 2.  
If MS-DOS or Windows XP is properly loaded, go to Procedure 4.  
Check 1 If one of the following error messages is displayed on the screen, press the F1 key  
as the message instructs. These errors occur when the system configuration  
preserved in the RTC memory (CMOS type memory) is not the same as the actual  
configuration or when the data is lost.  
If you press the F1 key as the message instructs, the SETUP screen appears to set  
the system configuration. If error message (b) appears often when the power is  
turned on, replace the RTC battery. If any other error message is displayed,  
perform Check 2.  
(a)  
(b)  
(c)  
(d)  
(e)  
(f)  
(g)  
*** Bad HDD type ***  
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......  
*** Bad RTC battery ***  
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......  
*** Bad configuration ***  
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......  
*** Bad memory size ***  
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......  
*** Bad time function ***  
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......  
*** Bad check sum (CMOS) ***  
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......  
*** Bad check sum (ROM) ***  
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......  
Check 2 If the following error message is displayed on the screen, press any key as the  
message instructs.  
The following error message appears when data stored in RAM under the resume  
function is lost because the battery has become discharged or the system board is  
damaged. Go to Procedure 3.  
WARNING: RESUME FAILURE.  
PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE.  
If any other error message displays, perform Check 3.  
14  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Check 3 The IRT checks the system board. When the IRT detects an error, the system  
stops or an error message appears.  
If one of the following error messages (1) through (17), (24) or (25) is displayed,  
go to Procedure 4.  
If error message (18) is displayed, go to the Keyboard Troubleshooting  
Procedures.  
If error message (19), (20) or (21) is displayed, go to the 2.5” HDD  
Troubleshooting Procedures.  
If error message (22) or (23) is displayed, go to the USB FDD Troubleshooting  
Procedures.  
(1) PIT ERROR  
(2) MEMORY REFRESH ERROR  
(3) TIMER CH.2 OUT ERROR  
(4) CMOS CHECKSUM ERROR  
(5) CMOS BAD BATTERY ERROR  
(6) FIRST 64KB MEMORY ERROR  
(7) FIRST 64KB MEMORY PARITY ERROR  
(8) VRAM ERROR  
(9) SYSTEM MEMORY ERROR  
(10) SYSTEM MEMORY PARITY ERROR  
(11) EXTENDED MEMORY ERROR  
(12) EXTENDED MEMORY PARITY ERROR  
(13) DMA PAGE REGISTER ERROR  
(14) DMAC #1 ERROR  
(15) DMAC #2 ERROR  
(16) PIC #1 ERROR  
(17) PIC #2 ERROR  
(18) KBC ERROR  
(19) HDC ERROR  
(20) HDD #0 ERROR  
(21) HDD #1 ERROR  
(22) NO FDD ERROR  
(23) FDC ERROR  
(24) TIMER INTERRUPT ERROR  
(25) RTC UPDATE ERROR  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Procedure 2  
Debugging Port Check  
Check the MiniPCI Debug board. The tool for debug port test is shown below.  
Figure 2-2 A set of tool for debug port test  
The test procedures are follows:  
1. Replace Mini PCI debug port with Wireless LAN card, check LED in the Mini PCI  
debug board  
The following is a list of the Test Point codes written to port 80h at the start  
of each routine, the beep codes issued for terminal errors, and a description  
of the POST routine. Unless otherwise noted, these codes are valid for  
Phoenix BIOS 4.0 Release 6.0.  
NOTE: The following routines are sorted by their test point numbers were assigned in the  
BIOS code. Their actual order as executed during POST can  
Be quite different.  
Code Beeps POST Routine Description  
02h  
03h  
04h  
06h  
08h  
09h  
0Ah  
0Bh  
0Ch  
0Eh  
0Fh  
10h  
11h  
12h  
13h  
Verify Real Mode  
Disable Non-Maskable Interrupt (NMI)  
Get CPU type  
Initialize system hardware  
Initialize chipset with initial POST values  
Set IN POST flag  
Initialize CPU registers  
Enable CPU cache  
Initialize caches to initial POST values  
Initialize I/O component  
Initialize the local bus IDE  
Initialize Power Management  
Load alternate registers with initial POST values  
Restore CPU control word during warm boot  
Initialize PCI Bus Mastering devices  
16  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Code Beeps POST Routine Description  
14h  
16h 1-2-2-3  
17h  
Initialize keyboard controller  
BIOS ROM checksum  
Initialize cache before memory autosize  
8254 timer initialization  
18h  
1Ah  
1Ch  
20h 1-3-1-1  
22h 1-3-1-3  
24h  
8237 DMA controller initialization  
Reset Programmable Interrupt Controller  
Test DRAM refresh  
Test 8742 Keyboard Controller  
Set ES segment register to 4 GB  
Enable A20 line  
26h  
28h  
Autosize DRAM  
29h  
2Ah  
Initialize POST Memory Manager  
Clear 512 KB base RAM  
2Ch 1-3-4-1  
2Eh 1-3-4-3  
2Fh  
30h 1-4-1-1  
32h  
RAM failure on address line xxxx*  
RAM failure on data bits xxxx* of low byte of memory bus  
Enable cache before system BIOS shadow  
RAM failure on data bits xxxx* of high byte of memory bus  
Test CPU bus-clock frequency  
Initialize Phoenix Dispatch Manager  
Warm start shut down  
33h  
36h  
38h  
Shadow system BIOS ROM  
3Ah  
Autosize cache  
3Ch  
3Dh  
42h  
Advanced configuration of chipset registers  
Load alternate registers with CMOS values  
Initialize interrupt vectors  
45h  
POST device initialization  
46h 2-1-2-3 Check ROM copyright notice  
48h  
49h  
4Ah  
4Bh  
4Ch  
4Eh  
50h  
51h  
52h  
54h  
Check video configuration against CMOS  
Initialize PCI bus and devices  
Initialize all video adapters in system  
QuietBoot start (optional)  
Shadow video BIOS ROM  
Display BIOS copyright notice  
Display CPU type and speed  
Initialize EISA board  
Test keyboard  
Set key click if enabled  
58h 2-2-3-1 Test for unexpected interrupts  
59h  
5Ah  
5Bh  
5Ch  
60h  
62h  
64h  
Initialize POST display service  
Display prompt "Press F2 to enter SETUP"  
Disable CPU cache  
Test RAM between 512 and 640 KB  
Test extended memory  
Test extended memory address lines  
Jump to UserPatch1  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
66h  
67h  
68h  
69h  
6Ah  
6Bh  
6Ch  
6Eh  
70h  
72h  
76h  
7Ch  
7Eh  
80h  
81h  
82h  
83h  
84h  
85h  
86h  
87h  
88h  
89h  
8Ah  
8Bh  
8Ch  
8Fh  
90h  
91h  
92h  
93h  
95h  
96h  
97h  
98h 1-2  
Configure advanced cache registers  
Initialize Multi Processor APIC  
Enable external and CPU caches  
Setup System Management Mode (SMM) area  
Display external L2 cache size  
Load custom defaults (optional)  
Display shadow-area message  
Display possible high address for UMB recovery  
Display error messages  
Check for configuration errors  
Check for keyboard errors  
Set up hardware interrupt vectors  
Initialize coprocessor if present  
Disable onboard Super I/O ports and IRQs  
Late POST device initialization  
Detect and install external RS232 ports  
Configure non-MCD IDE controllers  
Detect and install external parallel ports  
Initialize PC-compatible PnP ISA devices  
Re-initialize onboard I/O ports.  
Configure Motheboard Configurable Devices (optional)  
Initialize BIOS Data Area  
Enable Non-Maskable Interrupts (NMIs)  
Initialize Extended BIOS Data Area  
Test and initialize PS/2 mouse  
Initialize floppy controller (optional)  
Determine number of ATA drives (optional)  
Initialize hard-disk controllers  
Initialize local-bus hard-disk controllers  
Jump to UserPatch2  
Build MPTABLE for multi-processor boards  
Install CD ROM for boot  
Clear huge ES segment register  
Fixup Multi Processor table  
Search for option ROMs. One long, two short beeps on checksum failure  
99h  
Check for SMART Drive (optional)  
Shadow option ROMs  
9Ah  
9Ch  
9Dh  
9Eh  
9Fh  
A0h  
A2h  
A4h  
A8h  
Set up Power Management  
Initialize security engine (optional)  
Enable hardware interrupts  
Determine number of ATA and SCSI drives  
Set time of day  
Check key lock  
Initialize Typematic rate  
Erase F2 prompt  
18  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Code Beeps POST Routine Description  
AAh  
ACh  
AEh  
B0h  
B2h  
B4h 1  
B5h  
B6h  
B9h  
Bah  
BBh  
BCh  
BDh  
BEh  
BFh  
C0h  
C1h  
C2h  
C3h  
C4h  
C5h  
C6h  
C7h  
C8h  
C9h  
D2h  
Scan for F2 key stroke  
Enter SETUP  
Clear Boot flag  
Check for errors  
POST done - prepare to boot operating system  
One short beep before boot  
Terminate QuietBoot (optional)  
Check password (optional)  
Prepare Boot  
Initialize DMI parameters  
Initialize PnP Option ROMs  
Clear parity checkers  
Display MultiBoot menu  
Clear screen (optional)  
Check virus and backup reminders  
Try to boot with INT 19  
Initialize POST Error Manager (PEM)  
Initialize error logging  
Initialize error display function  
Initialize system error handler  
PnPnd dual CMOS (optional)  
Initialize notebook docking (optional)  
Initialize notebook docking late  
Force check (optional)  
Extended checksum (optional)  
Unknown interrupt  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Code Beeps For Boot Block in Flash ROM  
E0h  
E1h  
E2h  
E3h  
E4h  
E5h  
E6h  
E7h  
E8h  
E9h  
EAh  
EBh  
ECh  
EDh  
EEh  
EFh  
F0h  
F1h  
F2h  
F3h  
F4h  
F5h  
F6h  
F7h  
Initialize the chipset  
Initialize the bridge  
Initialize the CPU  
Initialize system timer  
Initialize system I/O  
Check force recovery boot  
Checksum BIOS ROM  
Go to BIOS  
Set Huge Segment  
Initialize Multi Processor  
Initialize OEM special code  
Initialize PIC and DMA  
Initialize Memory type  
Initialize Memory size  
Shadow Boot Block  
System memory test  
Initialize interrupt vectors  
Initialize Run Time Clock  
Initialize video  
Initialize System Management Mode  
1 Output one beep before boot  
Boot to Mini DOS  
Clear Huge Segment  
Boot to Full DOS  
20  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Procedure 3  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check  
Execute the following tests from the Diagnostic Test Menu. These tests check the system  
board. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostic, for more information on how to perform  
these tests.  
1. System test  
2. Memory test  
3. Keyboard test  
4. Display test  
5. Floppy Disk test  
6. VGA test  
7. VGA Memory test  
8. Hard Disk test  
9. CPU Temperature test  
10. Main Battery test  
11. BIOS test  
12. CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test  
13. System Status LED test  
14. Wireless LAN test  
15. LAN/Modem/Sound test  
16. UUID test-DMI Information (Write DMI)  
If an error is detected during these tests, go to Procedure 4.  
Procedure 4  
Replacement Check  
System board may be faulty. Disassemble the computer following the steps described in  
Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures and replace system board with a new one.  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.5 USB FDD Troubleshooting  
To check if the USB FDD is malfunctioning or not, follow the troubleshooting procedures  
below as instructed.  
Procedure 1: FDD Head Cleaning Check  
Procedure 2: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check  
Procedure 3: Connector Check and Replacement Check  
Procedure 1  
FDD Head Cleaning Check  
FDD head cleaning is one option available in the Diagnostic Program.  
After connecting USB FDD, insert the Diagnostics Disk in the floppy disk drive. Turn on the  
computer and run the test. And then clean the FDD heads using the cleaning kit. If the FDD  
still does not function properly after cleaning, go to Procedure 2.  
Detailed operation is given in Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics.  
If the test program cannot be executed on the computer, go to Procedure 3.  
22  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Procedure 2  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check  
Insert the Diagnostics Disk in the USB FDD, turn on the computer and run the test. Refer to  
Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics, for more information about the diagnostics test procedures.  
Make sure the floppy disk is formatted correctly and that the write protect tab is disabled.  
Floppy disk drive test error codes and their status names are listed in Table 2-7. If any other  
errors occur while executing the FDD diagnostics test, go to Check 1.  
Table 2-7 FDD error code and status  
Code  
Status  
01h  
02h  
03h  
04h  
06h  
08h  
09h  
10h  
20h  
40h  
60h  
80h  
Bad command  
Address mark not found  
Write protected  
Record not found  
Media replaced  
DMA overrun error  
DMA boundary error  
CRC error  
FDC error  
Seek error  
FDD not drive  
Time out error (Not ready)  
Write buffer error  
Data compare error  
EEh  
FFh  
Check 1 If the following message is displayed, disable the write protect tab on the floppy  
disk by sliding the write protect tab to “write enable”. If any other message  
appears, perform Check 2.  
Write protected  
Check 2 Make sure the floppy disk is formatted correctly. If it is, go to Procedure 3.  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Procedure 3  
Connector Check and Replacement Check  
USB FDD is connected to USB port on system board and US board. US board is also  
connected to system board by cable. The connection of cable and board may be defective.  
Otherwise, they may be faulty. Disassemble the computer following the steps described in  
Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures and perform the following checks.  
USB FDD can be connected to the following 4 ports on system board.  
Check 1 Make sure USB FDD is firmly connected to USB port. If the connection is loose,  
connect firmly and repeat Procedure 2. If the problem still occurs, go to Check 2.  
NOTE: When checking the connection, be sure to check it with care for the followings.  
1. Cable can not be disconnected from the connector.  
2. Cable is connected straight to the connector.  
3. Cable is connected all the way seated in the connector.  
4. Cable can not be broken.  
24  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Check 2 USB FDD may be faulty. Replace it with a new one. If the problem still occurs,  
perform Check 3.  
Check 3 Connect USB FDD to each port embedded on system board.  
If it does not work properly when connected to CN12, CN19, CN20 or all ports,  
perform Check 4.  
Check 4 System board may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the steps in  
Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.6 2.5” HDD Troubleshooting  
To check if 2.5” HDD is malfunctioning or not, follow the troubleshooting procedures below  
as instructed.  
Procedure 1: Partition Check  
Procedure 2: Message Check  
Procedure 3: Format Check  
Procedure 4: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check  
Procedure 5: Connector Check and Replacement Check  
CAUTION: The contents of the hard disk will be erased when the 2.5” HDD  
troubleshooting procedures are executed. Transfer the contents of the hard  
disk to floppy disks or other storage drive(s). For the backup, refer to the  
User’s Manual.  
Procedure 1  
Partition Check  
Insert the Toshiba MS-DOS system disk and start the computer. Perform the following  
checks:  
Check 1 Input C: and press Enter. If you cannot change to drive C, go to Check 2. If you  
can change to drive C, go to Procedure 2.  
Check 2 Input FDISK and press Enter. Choose Display Partition Information from the  
FDISK menu. If drive C is listed in the Display Partition Information, go to Check  
3. If drive C is not listed, return to the FDISK menu and choose the option to  
create a DOS partition or a logical DOS drive on drive C. If the problem still  
occurs, go to Procedure 2.  
Check 3 If drive C is listed as active in the FDISK menu, go to Check 4. If drive C is not  
listed as active, return to the FDISK menu and choose the option to set the active  
partition for drive C. Then go to Procedure 2.  
Check 4 Remove the system disk from the FDD and reboot the computer. If the problem  
still occurs, go to Procedure 2. Otherwise, the 2.5” HDD is operating normally.  
26  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Procedure 2  
Message Check  
When the power is turned on, the system performs the Initial Reliability Test (IRT) installed  
in the BIOS ROM. When the test detects an error, an error message is displayed on the screen.  
Make sure no floppy disk is in the FDD. Turn on the computer and check the message on the  
screen. When an OS starts from the 2.5” HDD, go to Procedure 3. Otherwise, start with  
Check 1 below and perform the other checks as instructed.  
Check 1 If any of the following messages appear, go to Procedure 3. If the following  
messages do not appear, perform Check 2.  
HDC ERROR  
or  
HDD #X ERROR (After 5 seconds this message will disappear.)  
Check 2 If either of the following messages appears, go to Check 3. If the following  
messages do not appear, perform Check 4.  
Insert system disk in drive  
Press any key when ready .....  
or  
Non-System disk or disk error  
Replace and press any key when ready  
Check 3 Using the SYS command of the MS-DOS, transfer the system to the 2.5” HDD. If  
the system is not transferred, go to Procedure 3. Refer to the MS-DOS Manual for  
detailed operation.  
If the following message appears on the display, the system program has been  
transferred to the HDD.  
System Transferred  
If an error message appears on the display, perform Check 4.  
Check 4 2.5” HDD(s) and the connector(s) of system board may be defective (Refer to the  
steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures for disassembling.). Insert  
HDD(s) to the connector(s) firmly. If it is (or they are) firmly connected, go to  
Procedure 3.  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Procedure 3  
Format Check  
The computer’s HDD is formatted using the MS-DOS FORMAT program or the physical  
format program of the test program. To format the HDD, start with Check 1 below and  
perform the other steps as required.  
Refer to the MS-DOS Manual for the operation of MS-DOS. For the format by the test  
program, refer to the Chapter 3.  
Check 1 Format an 2.5” HDD using MS-DOS FORMAT command. Type as FORMAT  
C:/S/U.  
If 2.5” HDD can not be formatted, perform Check 2.  
Check 2 Using the MS-DOS FDISK command, set the 2.5” HDD partition. If the partition  
is not set, go to Check 3. If it is set, format 2.5” HDD using MS-DOS FORMAT  
command.  
Check 3 Using the Diagnostic Disk, format 2.5” HDD with a format option (physical  
format). If HDD is formatted, set the 2.5” HDD partition using MS-DOS FDISK  
command.  
If you cannot format 2.5” HDD using the Tests and Diagnostic program, go to  
Procedure 4.  
28  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Procedure 4  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check  
The HDD test program is stored in the Diagnostics Disk. Perform all of the HDD tests in the  
Hard Disk Drive Test. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics, for more information about  
the HDD test program.  
If an error is detected during the HDD test, an error code and status will be displayed. The  
error codes and statuses are described in Table 2-8. If an error code is not displayed but the  
problem still occurs, go to Procedure 5.  
Table 2-8 2.5” Hard disk drive error code and status  
Code  
05  
Status  
HDD - HDC NOT RESET ERROR  
HDD - DRIVE NOT INITIALIZE  
HDD - DMA BOUNDARY ERROR  
HDD - BAD TRACK ERROR  
HDD - UNDEFINED ERROR  
HDD - OVERRUN ERROR (DRQ ON)  
HDD - BAD COMMAND ERROR  
HDD - ADDRESS MARK NOT FOUND  
HDD - RECORD NOT FOUND ERROR  
HDD - ECC ERROR  
07  
09  
0B  
BB  
08  
01  
02  
04  
10  
20  
HDD - HDC ERROR  
40  
HDD - SEEK ERROR  
80  
HDD - TIME OUT ERROR  
HDD - ECC RECOVER ENABLE  
HDD - DRIVE NOT READY  
HDD - WRITE FAULT  
11  
AA  
CC  
E0  
0A  
EE  
DA  
12  
HDD - STATUS ERROR  
HDD - BAD SECTOR  
HDD - ACCESS TIME ERROR  
HDD - NO HDD  
HDD - DMA CRC ERROR  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Procedure 5  
Connector Check and Replacement Check  
HDD(s) is/are connected to the connector(s) on the system board. The connection of HDD(s)  
and board may be defective. Otherwise, they may be faulty. Disassemble the computer  
following instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures and perform the following  
checks.  
Check 1 Make sure HDD(s) is/are firmly connected to the connector(s) on the system  
board.  
If any of the connections are loose, reconnect firmly and repeat Procedure 1. If the  
problem still occurs, go to Check 2.  
Check 2 (One of) HDD(s) may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the  
instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures and check the operation. If the  
problem still occurs, perform Check 3.  
Check 3 System board may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the instructions  
in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.  
30  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.7 Keyboard Troubleshooting  
To check if the computer’s keyboard is malfunctioning or not, follow the troubleshooting  
procedures below as instructed.  
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check  
Procedure 2: Connector and Replacement Check  
Procedure 1  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check  
Execute the Keyboard Test (DIAGNOSTIC TEST) and Pressed key display test (ONLY  
ONE TEST) in the Diagnostic Program. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics, for more  
information on how to perform the test program.  
If an error occurs, go to Procedure 2. If an error does not occur, keyboard is functioning  
properly.  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Procedure 2  
Connector and Replacement Check  
The connection of cable and board may be defective. Otherwise, they may be faulty.  
Disassemble the computer following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement  
Procedures, and perform the following checks:  
Check 1 Make sure keyboard cable is firmly connected to system board.  
If the connection is loose, reconnect firmly and repeat Procedure 1. If the problem  
still occurs, go to Check 2.  
Check 2 Keyboard may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the instructions in  
Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the problem still occurs, perform Check 3.  
Check 3 System board may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the instructions  
in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.  
32  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.8 Touch pad Troubleshooting  
To check if the computer’s touch pad is malfunctioning or not, follow the troubleshooting  
procedures below as instructed.  
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check  
Procedure 2: Connector and Replacement Check  
Procedure 1  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check  
Execute the Touch pad test (ONLY ONE TEST) in the Diagnostic Program. Refer to Chapter  
3, Tests and Diagnostics, for more information on how to perform the test program.  
If an error occurs, go to Procedure 2. If an error does not occur, touch pad is functioning  
properly.  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Procedure 2  
Connector and Replacement Check  
The connection of cable and board may be defective. Otherwise, they may be faulty.  
Disassemble the computer following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement  
Procedures, and perform the following checks:  
Check 1 Make sure the cable is firmly connected to system board.  
If the connection is loose, reconnect firmly and repeat Procedure 1. If the problem  
still occurs, go to Check 2.  
Check 2 Touch Pad or the cable may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the  
instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the problem still occurs,  
perform Check 3.  
Check 3 System board may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the instructions  
in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures  
34  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.9 Display Troubleshooting  
To check if the computer’s display is malfunctioning or not, follow the troubleshooting  
procedures below as instructed.  
Procedure 1: External Monitor Check  
Procedure 2: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check  
Procedure 3: Connector and Cable Check  
Procedure 4: Replacement Check  
Procedure 1  
External Monitor Check  
Connect an external monitor to the computer’s external monitor port, then boot the computer.  
The computer automatically detects the external monitor.  
If the external monitor works correctly, the internal LCD may be faulty. Go to Procedure 3.  
If the external monitor appears to have the same problem as the internal monitor, system  
board may be faulty. Go to Procedure 2.  
Procedure 2  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check  
The Display Test program is stored in Diagnostics disk. This program checks the display  
controller on system board. Insert the Diagnostics disk in the USB FDD, turn on the computer  
and run the test. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics for details. If an error is detected,  
go to Procedure 3.  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting Procedures  
Procedure 3  
Connector and Cable Check  
LCD Module is connected to system board by an LCD/FL cable. FL inverter board is also  
connected to system board by an LCD/FL cable. And, fluorescent lamp is connected to FL  
inverter board by HV cable. Their cables may be disconnected from system board or FL  
inverter board. Disassemble the computer following the steps described in Chapter 4,  
Replacement Procedures.  
If the connection is loose, reconnect firmly and restart the computer. If the problem still  
occurs, go to Procedure 4.  
36  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting Procedures  
Procedure 4  
Replacement Check  
Fluorescent lamp, FL inverter, LCD module, HV cable and LCD/FL cable are connected to  
display circuits. Any of these components may be faulty. Refer to Chapter 4, Replacement  
Procedures, for instructions on how to disassemble the computer and then perform the  
following checks:  
If fluorescent lamp does not light, perform Check 1.  
If characters or graphics on the internal display are not displayed clearly, perform  
Check 4.  
If some screen functions do not operate properly, perform Check 4.  
If fluorescent lamp remains lit when the display is closed, perform Check 5.  
Check 1 Replace fluorescent lamp with a new one following the instructions in Chapter 4,  
Replacement Procedures and test the display again. If the problem still occurs,  
perform Check 2.  
Check 2 LCD/FL cable may be faulty. Replace FL/LCD cable with a new one following the  
instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedure and test the display again. If the  
problem still occurs, perform Check 3.  
Check 3 FL inverter may be faulty. Replace FL inverter with a new one following the  
instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedure and test the display again. If the  
problem still occurs, perform Check 4.  
Check 4 LCD module may be faulty. Replace LCD module with a new one following the  
instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedure and test the display again. If the  
problem still occurs, perform Check 5.  
Check 5 System board may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the instructions  
in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedure.  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.10 Optical Disk Drive Troubleshooting  
To check if optical disk drive is malfunctioning or not, follow the troubleshooting procedures  
below as instructed.  
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check  
Procedure 2: Connector Check and Replacement Check  
Procedure 1  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check  
Execute the CD-ROM/DVD-ROM Test in the Diagnostic Program. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests  
and Diagnostics for more information on how to perform the test program.  
Prepare the tools before the test.  
If any error is detected by the test, go to Procedure 2.  
Procedure 2  
Connector Check and Replacement Check  
The connection of optical disk drive and system board may be defective. Otherwise, they may  
be faulty. Disassemble the computer following the steps described in Chapter 4 and perform  
the following checks:  
Check 1 Make sure optical disk drive is firmly connected to the connector on system board.  
If the connection is loose, reconnect it firmly and return to Procedure 2. If the  
problem still occurs, perform Check 2.  
Check 2 Optical disk drive may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the steps in  
Chapter 4. If the problem still occurs, perform Check 3.  
Check 3 System board may be faulty. Replace it with new one following the instructions in  
Chapter 4.  
38  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.11 Modem Troubleshooting  
To check if modem is malfunctioning or not, follow the troubleshooting procedures below as  
instructed.  
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check  
Procedure 2: Connector Check and Replacement Check  
Procedure 1  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check  
Execute Modem test in the LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 test program. Refer to Chapter  
3, Tests and Diagnostics for more information on how to perform the test program.  
If any error is detected, perform Procedure 2.  
Procedure 2  
Connector Check and Replacement Check  
MDC (Modem Daughter Card) is used as the modem for this computer. MDC is connected to  
system board by connector (CN1&CN28). And also, MDC is connected to system board by  
modem cable (MJ2&CN14). If modem malfunctions, the connection of cable, board and  
module may be defective. Otherwise, they may be faulty.  
Disassemble the computer following the steps described in Chapter 4 and perform the  
following checks:  
Check 1 Make sure the following connections are firmly connected.  
If any connector is disconnected, connect it firmly and return to Procedure 1. If the  
problem still occurs, perform Check 2.  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting Procedures  
Check 2 Modem cable may be faulty. Replace it with a new one. If the problem still occurs,  
perform Check 3.  
Check 3 MDC may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the steps in Chapter 4. If  
the problem still occurs, perform Check 4.  
Check 4 Cable between MDC and system board may be faulty. Replace it with a new one  
following the instructions in Chapter 4. If the problem still occurs, perform Check  
5.  
Check 6 System board may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the instruction in  
Chapter 4.  
40  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.12 LAN Troubleshooting  
To check if the computer’s LAN is malfunctioning or not, follow the troubleshooting  
procedures below as instructed.  
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check  
Procedure 2: Connector Check and Replacement Check  
Procedure 1  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check  
Execute LAN test in the LAN/Modem test program. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics  
for more information on how to perform the test program.  
If any error is detected by the test, go to Procedure 2.  
Procedure 2  
Connector Check and Replacement Check  
The LAN function is embedded on system board. If LAN malfunctions, its connection is  
defective or LAN cable and system board may be faulty.  
Check 1 Make sure LAN cable is firmly connected to the connector CN9. If the problem  
still occurs, perform Check 2.  
Check 2 LAN cable may be faulty. Replace it with a new one. If the problem still occurs,  
perform Check 3.  
Check 3 System board may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the instruction in  
Chapter 4.  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.13 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting  
To check if the computer's Wireless LAN is malfunctioning or not, follow the troubleshooting  
procedures below as instructed.  
Procedure 1: Transmitting-Receiving Check  
Procedure 2: Antennas' Connection Check  
Procedure 3: Replacement Check  
Procedure 1  
Transmitting-Receiving Check  
Before starting the test, make sure the wireless communication switch is set in the ON  
position.  
Check 1 Execute Wireless LAN test program to check the transmitting-receiving function  
of wireless LAN. You will need a second computer that can communicate by  
wireless LAN. Perform the test following the instructions described in Chapter 3.  
If the computer passes the test, the function is correctly working. If the computer  
does not pass the test, perform Procedure 2.  
42  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting Procedures  
Procedure 2  
Antennas' Connection Check  
The wireless LAN function-wiring diagram is shown below:  
Any of the connections may be defective. Disassemble the computer following the steps  
described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures, and perform the following checks:  
Check 1 Make sure the wireless communication switch is “On”.  
If the switch is “Off”, turn it “On”. If the problem still occurs, perform Check 2.  
Check 2 Make sure wireless LAN card (Mini-PCI) is firmly connected to the CN2200 on  
system board. If the connector is defective, connect it firmly and perform  
Procedure 1. If the problem still occurs, perform Check 3.  
Check 3 Make sure that wireless LAN antenna cables (black and white) are firmly  
connected to the connectors on Wireless LAN card. If wireless LAN antenna  
cables are not connected properly, connect them firmly and perform Procedure 1.  
If the problem still occurs, go to the procedure 3.  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting Procedures  
Procedure 3  
Replacement Check  
Wireless LAN card, wireless LAN antenna or system board may be faulty. Refer to Chapter 4,  
Replacement Procedures, for instructions on how to disassemble the computer and then  
perform the following checks:  
Check 1 Wireless LAN antenna may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the  
instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the problem still occurs,  
perform Check 2.  
Check 2 Wireless LAN card may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the  
instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the problem still occurs,  
perform Check 3.  
Check3 System board may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the instructions  
in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.  
44  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.14 Sound Troubleshooting  
To check if the sound function is malfunctioning or not, follow the troubleshooting procedures  
below as instructed.  
Procedure 1: Connector Check  
Procedure 2: Replacement Check  
Procedure 1  
Connector Check  
The connection of sound system is shown in the following figure.  
As the connection may be defective, disassemble the PC and check each connection.  
If the problem still occurs, go to Procedure 2.  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting Procedures  
Procedure 2  
Replacement Check  
If External microphone/Headphone does not work properly, perform check 1.  
If Internal microphone /Speaker does not work properly, perform check 2.  
If HP out &SPDIF does not work properly, perform check 3.  
If Line in/ Volume control does not work properly, perform check 4.  
Check 1 External microphone/Headphone may be faulty. Replace it with a new one  
following the steps in Chapter 4. If the problem still occurs, perform Check 5.  
Check 2 Internal microphone /Speaker may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following  
the steps in Chapter 4. If the problem still occurs, perform Check 5.  
Check 3 HP out &SPDIF out may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the steps  
in Chapter 4. If the problem still occurs, perform Check 5.  
Check 4 Line in/ Volume control may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the  
steps in Chapter 4. If the problem still occurs, perform Check 6.  
Check 5 Flat cable between AD board/Speaker and system board may be faulty. Replace it  
with new cable following the instructions in Chapter 4. If the problem still occurs,  
perform Check 6.  
Check 6 Audio board/System board may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the  
instructions in Chapter 4.  
46  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.15 VGA Troubleshooting  
Procedure 1  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check  
Execute VGA test in the test program. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics for more  
information on how to perform the test program.  
If any error is detected, perform Procedure 2.  
Procedure 2  
Connector Check and Replacement Check  
VDC (VGA Daughter Card) is used as the VGA for this computer. VDC is connected to  
system board by connector (CN1&CN27) . And also, VDC is connected to system board by  
VDC power cable (CN2&CN22) . If VDC malfunctions, The connection of cable, board and  
module may be defective. Otherwise, they may be faulty.  
Disassemble the computer following the steps described in Chapter 4 and perform the  
following checks:  
Check 1 Make sure the following connections are firmly connected.  
As the connection may be defective, disassemble the PC and check each connection.  
If the problem still occurs, go to Check 5.  
Check 2 VGA cable may be faulty. Replace it with a new one. If the problem still occurs,  
perform Check 3.  
Check 3 VDC may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the steps in Chapter 4. If  
the problem still occurs, perform Check 4.  
Check 4 Cables between VDC and system board may be faulty. Replace it with new cable  
following the instructions in Chapter 4. If the problem still occurs, perform Check  
5.  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting Procedures  
Check 5 System board may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the instruction in  
Chapter 4.  
48  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.16 Fingerprint Troubleshooting  
To check if the computer’s Fingerprint is malfunctioning or not, follow the troubleshooting  
procedures below as instructed.  
Procedure 1: Connector Check and Replacement Check  
Procedure 1  
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check  
Execute Fingerprint test in the test program. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics for  
more information on how to perform the test program.  
If any error is detected, perform Procedure 2.  
Procedure 2  
Connector Check and Replacement Check  
The Fingerprint function is embedded on system board. If Fingerprint malfunctions, its  
connection is defective or Fingerprint cable and system board may be faulty.  
Check 1 Make sure Fingerprint cable is firmly connected to the connector CN5. If the  
problem still occurs, perform Check 2.  
Check 2 Fingerprint cable may be faulty. Replace it with a new one. If the problem still  
occurs, perform Check4.  
Check 3 Fingerprint may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the steps in  
Chapter 4. If the problem still occurs, perform Check 4.  
Check 4 System board may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the instruction in  
Chapter 4.  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting Procedures  
2.17 Bluetooth Troubleshooting  
To check if the computer’s Bluetooth is malfunctioning or not, follow the troubleshooting  
procedure below as instructed.  
Procedure 1: Connector Check and Replacement Check  
Procedure 1  
Connector Check and Replacement Check  
The Bluetooth function is connected to system board. If Bluetooth malfunctions, its  
connection is defective or Bluetooth cable and system board may be faulty.  
Check 1 Make sure Bluetooth cable is firmly connected to the connector CN1. If the  
problem still occurs, perform Check 2.  
Check 2 Bluetooth cable may be faulty. Replace it with a new one. If the problem still  
occurs, perform Check 3.  
Check 3 Bluetooth may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the steps in Chapter  
4. If the problem still occurs, perform Check 4.  
Check 4 System board may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the instruction in  
Chapter 4.  
50  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
Chapter 3  
Diagnostic Programs  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
Chapter 3 Contents  
3.1  
3.2  
3.3  
3.4  
3.5  
3.6  
3.7  
3.8  
3.9  
Tests and Diagnostics Software Overview ............................................................ 3-3  
Executing the Diagnostic Test ............................................................................... 3-4  
Subtest names......................................................................................................... 3-8  
System Test.......................................................................................................... 3-11  
Memory Test........................................................................................................ 3-13  
Keyboard Test...................................................................................................... 3-16  
Display Test ......................................................................................................... 3-19  
Floppy Disk Test.................................................................................................. 3-34  
Hard Disk Test..................................................................................................... 3-36  
3.10 Real Time Clock Test .......................................................................................... 3-39  
3.11 Cache Memory Test............................................................................................. 3-41  
3.12 High Resolution Display Test.............................................................................. 3-43  
3.13 Multimedia Test................................................................................................... 3-49  
3.14 MEMORY2 Test.................................................................................................. 3-50  
3.15 Error Codes and Error Status Names................................................................... 3-52  
3.16 Running Test........................................................................................................ 3-54  
3.17 DMI INFOEMATION......................................................................................... 3-55  
3.17.1  
3.17.2  
Check DMI Information .............................................................................. 3-55  
Write DMI Information................................................................................ 3-55  
3.18 Log Utilities ......................................................................................................... 3-57  
3.18.1 Operations.................................................................................................... 3-57  
3.19 System Configuration .......................................................................................... 3-59  
3.20 Running Test Edit Item........................................................................................ 3-60  
3.20.1  
3.20.2  
Function Description.................................................................................... 3-60  
Operation Description.................................................................................. 3-60  
3.21 Common Tests and Operation ............................................................................. 3-62  
3.21.1  
3.21.2  
3.21.3  
3.21.4  
3.21.5  
How to operate a window ............................................................................ 3-62  
How to Stop the Test Program..................................................................... 3-62  
Test Status Screen........................................................................................ 3-62  
Test Stop Display......................................................................................... 3-64  
How to enter data......................................................................................... 3-64  
2
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
3.1 Tests and Diagnostics Software Overview  
This chapter explains how to use the Tests and Diagnostics Software for the Satellite P100  
and Satellite Pro P100 computer systems.  
NOTES: Before starting the Tests and Diagnostics software:  
1. Check all cables for loose connections.  
2. Exit any application and close Windows.  
The Diagnostics Menu consists of the following options:  
Diagnostic Test  
Running Test  
DMI Information  
Log Utilities  
System Configuration  
Option  
The Diagnostic Test Menu consists of the following functional tests:  
System Test  
Memory Test  
Keyboard Test  
Display Test  
Floppy Disk Test  
Hard Disk Test  
Real Time Clock Test  
Cache Memory Test  
High Resolution Display Test  
Multimedia Test  
Memory2 Test  
FDD & HDD Error Retry Count Set  
The following equipment is required to perform some of the diagnostic test programs:  
The Diagnostics Disk (all tests)  
A formatted working disk for the floppy disk drive test (all tests)  
A CD test media (Toshiba Backup CD ROM for the CD-ROM test)  
The following sections detail the tests contained within the Diagnostic Test Menu. Refer to  
Sections 3.18, 3.19, 3.20 and, 3.21 for detailed information on the remaining functions of the  
Tests and Diagnostics software.  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test  
DOS is required to run the Diagnostics Program. To start the programs follow these steps:  
1. Create a DOS bootable disk and copy all the files from the Tests and Diagnostics  
software to the disk.  
2. Insert the boot disk into the computer’s floppy disk drive and turn on the computer.  
The following screen displays:  
TOSHIBA Satellite(Pro) P100 Diagnostics  
Version v1.00 (C) Copyright QUANTA Corp. 2005-  
::Select item  
ESC :Escape  
[ DIAGNOSTICS MENU ]  
01.DIAGNOSTIC TEST  
02.RUNNING TEST  
03.DMI INFORMATION  
04.LOG UTILITIES  
05.SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  
06.OPTION  
99.EXIT  
3. To select the Diagnostic Test from the Diagnostics Menu use the arrow keys to set the  
highlight bar to 01 and press Enter.  
4
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
The following menu displays:  
TOSHIBA Satellite(Pro) P100 Diagnostics  
Version V1.00 (C) Copyright QUANTA Corp. 2005-  
::Select item  
ESC :Escape  
[ DIAGNOSTICS MENU ]  
01. DIAGNOSTIC TEST  
[ DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU ]  
01. SYSTEM TEST  
08. CACHE MEMORY TEST  
09. HIGH RESOLUTION DISPLAY TEST  
10. MULTIMEDIA TEST  
02. MEMORY TEST  
03. KEYBOARD TEST  
04. DISPLAY TEST  
11. MEMORY2 TEST  
88. FDD&HDD ERROR RETRY COUNT SET  
99. EXIT TO DIAGNOSTICS MENU  
05. FLOPPY DISK TEST  
06. HARD DISK TEST  
07. REAL TIME CLOCK TEST  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
Refer to Sections 3.4 through 3.14 for detailed descriptions of Diagnostics Tests 1 through  
11. Item 88 sets the floppy disk drive and hard disk drive error retry count. Item 99 exits the  
submenu of the Diagnostic Test and returns to the Diagnostics Menu.  
4. Select the subtest you want to execute and press Enter. The following menu displays:  
TOSHIBA Satellite(Pro) P100 Diagnostics  
Version V1.00 (C) Copyright QUANTA Corp. 2005-  
: :Select item  
ESC :Escape  
[ DIAGNOSTICS MENU ]  
[ SYSTEM TEST ]  
01. FAN ON/OFF  
01. DIAGNOSTIC TEST  
0
01. FAN ON/OFF  
02. Battery Test  
[ DIAGNOST
03. CPU Temperature  
99. Exit to DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU  
01. SYSTEM TEST  
.
0
02. MEMORY TEST  
08
09. HIGH RESOLUTION DISPLAY TEST  
10. MULTIMEDIA TEST  
03. KEYBOARD TEST  
04. DISPLAY TEST  
05. FLOPPY DISK TEST  
06. HARD DISK TEST  
11. MEMRY2 TEST  
88. FDD&HDD ERROR RETRY COUNT SET  
07. REAL TIME CLOCK TEST 99. EXIT TO DIAGNOSTICS MENU  
5. Select the desired test from the subtest menu and press Enter. The following Test  
Parameter menu displays:  
6
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
TOSHIBA Satellite(Pro) P100 Diagnostics  
Version V1.00 (C) Copyright QUANTA Corp. 2005-  
: :Select item  
ESC :Escape  
[ DIAGN
YSTEM TEST ]  
Test  
erature  
[ TEST PARAMETER ]  
01. DIAG
FF  
01. Go To Test  
02. Test Loop : YES  
03. Error Stop : NO  
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU  
0
01. SYS
TIME CLOCK TEST  
10. NPX TEST  
11. HIGH RESOLUTION DISPLAY TEST  
12. MULTIMEDIA TEST  
13. USB TEST  
02. MEMORY TEST  
03. KEYBOARD TEST  
04. DISPLAY TEST  
05. FLOPPY DISK TEST  
06. HARD DISK TEST  
14. MEMORY2 TEST  
07. REAL TIME CLOCK TEST 88. FDD&HDD ERROR RETRY COUNT SET  
99. EXIT TO DIAGNOSTICS MENU  
Use the arrow keys to highlight the desired option and press Enter.  
Go To Test  
Move the highlight bar to Go To Test and press Enter to start executing the test.  
Test Loop  
Select NO to return the screen to the subtest menu after the test is complete.  
Select YES to set the test to run continuously until it is halted by the user.  
Error Stop  
Select NO to keep the test running even if an error is found.  
Select YES to stop the test program when an error is found and display the HALT  
OPERATION screen as shown below:  
[[ HALT OPERATION ]]  
1: Test end  
2: Continue  
3: Retry  
These three selections have the following functions:  
1: Terminates the test program and exits to the subtest menu.  
2: Continues the test from the error.  
3: Restarts the test from the beginning.  
Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired option and press Enter.  
Table 3-1 in Section 3.3 lists the function of each test on the subtest menu. Table 3-2 in  
Section 3.15 lists the error codes and error status for each error.  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
3.3 Subtest names  
Table 3-1 lists the subtest names for each test program in the Diagnostic  
Test menu.  
Table 3-1 Subtest Names(1/3)  
No.  
Test Name  
No.  
Subtest Name  
FAN ON/OFF check  
01  
02  
03  
SYSTEM TEST  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
Battery TEST  
CPU Temperature  
CIR Remote Control Test  
FINGERPRINT TEST  
Conventional Memory  
Protected Mode  
MEMORY TEST  
Protected Mode (32MB-MAX)  
RAM Refresh  
Stress Test  
KEYBOARD TEST  
Pressed Key Display [106]  
Pressed Key Display [103]  
Hot Key Display [6 Key]  
Hot Key Display [7 Key]  
Keyboard LED  
PS/2 Mouse (Pointing 2Button)  
Character Attributes  
Character Set  
04  
DISPLAY TEST  
80* 25 Character Display  
320* 200 Graphics Display  
640* 200 Graphics Display  
640* 480 Graphics Display  
Display Page  
“H” Pattern Display  
Video DAC Register W/R/C  
Color Graphics Display  
Color Attributes Display  
Color Tiling  
8
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
Table 3-1 Subtest Names(2/3)  
No.  
Test Name  
FLOPPY DISK TEST  
No.  
Subtest Name  
Sequential Read  
Sequential W/R/C  
05  
06  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
01  
02  
03  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
Random Address/Data  
Write Specified Address  
Read Specified Address  
Sequential Read  
HARD DISK TEST  
Address Uniqueness  
Random Address Data  
Cross Talk and Peek Shift  
Write Specified Address  
Read Specified Address  
Sequential Write  
W-R-C Specified Address  
Real Time Test  
07  
08  
REAL TIME CLOCK  
TEST  
Backup Memory Test  
Real Time Carry Test  
Constant Data Test  
CACHE MEMORY  
TEST  
Address Pattern Test  
Increment/Decrement Test  
Bit Shift Pattern Test  
*Write Disturb Test  
Checker Board Test  
Marching Test  
Working Data Test  
09  
HIGH RESOLUTION  
DISPLAY TEST  
VRAM W/R/C Test  
640* 480 Mode Display  
800* 600 Mode Display  
1024* 768 Mode Display  
“H” Pattern Display  
Focus Test (“E” Pattern)  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
Table 3-1 Subtest Names(3/3)  
No.  
Test Name  
No.  
Subtest Name  
Sequential Read Test  
10  
11  
MULTIMEDIA TEST  
01  
02  
03  
04  
01  
02  
03  
04  
Random Read Test  
Read Specified Address Test  
1 point W/R/C Test  
MEMORY2  
All one/zero Test  
Walking 1/Walking 0 Test(Left)  
Walking 1/Walking 0 Test(Right)  
Walking 1/Walking 0 Test(Left /Right)  
*This test cannot support.  
10  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
3.4 System Test  
To execute the System Test select 01 from the Diagnostic Test Menu, press Enter and follow  
the directions on the screen. The System Test contains two subtests. Move the highlight bar  
to the subtest you want to execute and press Enter.  
Subtest 01  
FAN ON/OFF Checking  
Select 1,2,3 to control FAN on/off , 1=Fan on , 2=Fan off , 3=Exit .  
[BD1FAN.EXE] Program Version : 1.0  
1: Fan On 2: Fan Off 3: Exit  
Fan1 Status On Fan1RPM : 5000 or Fan1 Status OFF Fan1RPM : 0  
Fan2 Status On Fan2RPM : 4000 or Fan2 Status OFF Fan2RPM : 0  
Subtest 02  
Battery Test  
This will display battery information for check , press [ESC] to exit .  
voltage  
temperature  
current  
: 12522 mV  
: 24.4 ‘C  
: 1330 mA  
: 1327 mA  
Remaining capacity alarm  
Remaining time alarm  
Battery mode  
: 400 mAh  
: 10 min  
: 0  
average current  
AtRate  
: 0 mA  
relative state of charge : 93 %  
absolute state of charge : 89 %  
At rate time to full  
At rate time to empty  
At rate O. K.  
: 65535 min  
: 65535 min  
: FFFF  
remaining capacity  
full charge capacity  
run time to empty  
average time to empty  
average time to full  
cycle count  
: 3546 mAh  
: 3800 mAh  
: -1 min.  
Maximun error  
: 2 %  
Charging current  
Charging voltage  
Manufacturer name  
Device name  
Device chemistry  
Manufacturer data  
Manufacture date  
: 2800 mA  
: 12600 mA  
: SANYO  
: NS2P3SZDNVWR  
: LION  
: -1 min.  
: 101 min.  
: 10 times  
: 4000 mAh  
: 11100 mV  
design capacity  
design voltage  
: 0  
specification information : 2.1  
: 9/13/2005  
serial no.  
STATUS  
: 32009  
: INIT  
Press [ESC] KEY to exit  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
Subtest 03  
Subtest 04  
CPU Temperature  
This will display CPU Temperature for check , press [ESC] to exit .  
[CPU_TEMP.EXE] Program Version : 1.0 08-08-2005  
CPU Temperature : XX  
CIR Remote Control Test  
When you execute this subtest, the remote control layout is drawn on the  
display. When any key is pressed, the corresponding key on the screen  
changes from light to dark , press [ESC] key to exit .  
QCI BD1 CIR Test Program Ver.:1.00  
Layout of a CIR Remote Control (14 keys)  
IF TEST OK, Press [ESC] key to exit  
Subtest 05  
Fingerprint Test  
This program will scan your define finger 3 times to get default finger data ,  
and rescan to verify again , so you may need to scan 5 times , if error , it will  
retry and get right finger .  
NOTE: Execution of this program destroys fingerprint data .  
12  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
3.5 Memory Test  
To execute the Memory Test select 02 from the Diagnostic Test Menu, press Enter and  
follow the directions on the screen. The Memory Test contains five subtests that test the  
computer’s memory. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to execute and press  
Enter.  
NOTE: If NO is selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter menu, the Test Status  
screen displays while the test is executing. When the test is complete the Memory Test  
menu displays.  
If YES is selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter menu, the Test Status screen  
displays while the test is executing. Press Ctrl + break to return to the Memory Test menu.  
Subtest 01  
Conventional Memory  
This subtest first writes test data patterns to conventional memory (0 to 640  
KB), then reads the new data and compares the result with the original data  
patterns.  
If a compare error occurs, the write data, read data, and test address display on  
the screen. Addresses are displayed in 4KB increments during the test.  
Test Process:  
1. Byte Enable Test  
One bit write/ 8 bit read” is executed and the new data is compared  
with the original data.  
Test data = CCAA5533H, 80000000H  
2. Byte Enable Test  
“One bit write/16 bit read” is executed and the new data is compared  
with the original data.  
Test data = CCAA5533H, 80000000H  
3. Data bus test  
“One bit write/16 bit read” is executed and the new data is compared  
with the original data.  
Test data = 1H, 2H, 4H, 8H, 10H, through 80000000H.  
4. Fixed data test  
“16 bit write/ 16 bit read” is executed and the new data is compared  
to the original data.  
Test data = FFFFFFFFH, 00000000H, 80018001H  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
5. Address pattern test  
“16 bit write and 16 bit read” of address pattern data is executed and  
the new data is compared with the original data.  
Test data = 0000H, 0004H, 0008H, 000CH,...8000H, 8004H, through  
FFECH  
Subtest 02  
Protected Mode  
This subtest first writes data patterns and address data from 1 to 32 MB, then  
reads the new data and compares the result with the original data patterns.  
Addresses are displayed in 64KB increments during the test.  
.
Test Process:  
1. Switch to Protected Mode. (INT 15H)  
2. Tests 256KB - 640KB and 1MB to 32MB of installed memory.  
Executes Step 1 through Step 5 of Subtest 1. The test data is the same  
as Subtest 1.  
Subtest 03  
Protected Mode [32MB - MAX]  
This subtest first writes data patterns and address data from 32MB to the  
maximum installed memory, reads the new data, and then compares the result  
with the original data patterns. Addresses are displayed in 64KB increments  
during the test.  
Test Process:  
1. Switch to Protected Mode. (INT 15H)  
2. Tests from 32MB to the maximum installed memory (extended  
memory). Executes Step 1 through Step 5 of Subtest 1. The test data is  
the same as Subtest 1.  
Subtest 04  
RAM Refresh  
This subtest writes a data pattern (CCAA5533H ) in 4KB from 0 to the  
maximum installed memory, then waits for a memory refresh cycle (16 ms or  
more), reads the new data, and compares the result with the original data  
pattern.  
14  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
Test Process:  
1. Checks the memory size to determine the maximum size of installed  
memory.  
2. Tests memory addresses 0 to the maximum installed.  
3. Writes, reads, and compares test data after a memory refresh cycle  
(16ms or more).  
NOTE: There may be a short delay between write and read operations,  
depending on the memory size.  
Subtest 05  
Stress Test  
This subtest writes the following 16KB data patterns to the Write/Read Buffer  
in conventional memory.  
data: FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000000000000000  
5555555555555555AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA  
CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC3333333333333333  
0000000000000000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF  
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA5555555555555555  
3333333333333333CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC  
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000000000000000  
0000000000000000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF  
5555555555555555AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA  
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA5555555555555555  
CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC3333333333333333  
3333333333333333CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
3.6 Keyboard Test  
To execute the Keyboard Test select 03 from the Diagnostic Test Menu, press Enter and  
follow the directions on the screen. The Keyboard Test contains seven subtests that test the  
computer’s keyboard and mouse actions. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to  
execute and press Enter.  
NOTE: The Test Loop and Error Stop parameters are not enabled for the Keyboard test.  
Subtest 01  
Pressed Key Display [106 Keyboard]  
When you execute this subtest, the keyboard layout is drawn on the display.  
When any key is pressed, the corresponding key on the screen changes from  
light to dark. Holding a key down enables the auto-repeat function which  
causes the key’s display character to blink.  
[[[ Press Key Display ]]]  
Layout of a keyboard (106 keys)  
Subtest 02  
Pressed Key Display [103 Keyboard]  
This subtest is used for the 103 keyboard and functions the same as Subtest 1.  
16  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
Subtest 03  
Subtest 04  
Subtest 05  
Hot Key Display [6 Key]  
This subtest is used for the 6 hot key and functions the same as Subtest 1.  
Hot Key Display [7 Key]  
This subtest is used for the 7 hot key and functions the same as Subtest 1.  
Keyboard LED  
The LED display for Num Lock, Caps Lock, and Scroll Lock (in that order)  
will flash repeatedly. Confirm this visually. The following screen displays  
while this test executes.  
Keyboard LED “ON” CHECK !  
Press ANY KEY  
Subtest 06  
PS/2 Mouse (Pointing)  
This subtest checks the function of mouse as shown below.  
A) Pointing device (mouse)  
B) Mouse buttons  
Please move cursor to upper left and press left button , screen will display  
<PRESS> in left rectangle , move cursor to lower right and press right  
button , screen will display <PRESS> in right rectangle , the program exit .  
If left and right button short , screen will display <Left and Right Button  
maybe short > , the program exit .  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
LEFT  
PRESS  
TOUCH_PAD TEST  
RIGHT  
PRESS  
Please Do Not Press the Left and Right Button At The Same Time  
18  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
3.7 Display Test  
To execute the Display Test select 04 from the Diagnostic Test Menu, press Enter and follow  
the directions displayed on the screen. The Display Test contains twelve subtests that test the  
display in various modes. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to execute and  
press Enter.  
Subtest 01  
Character Attributes  
This subtest displays character attributes and color attributes. The character  
attributes are: normal, intensified, reverse, and blinking. The color attributes  
are: blue, red, magenta, cyan, yellow, and white. These seven colors each  
display a background color, foreground color and high resolution color. The  
screen below displays when this subtest is executed.  
CHARACTER ATTRIBUTES  
NEXT LINE SHOWS NORMAL DISPLAY  
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN  
NEXT LINE SHOWS INTENSIFIED DISPLAY  
IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII  
NEXT LINE SHOWS REVERSE DISPLAY  
RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR  
RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR  
NEXT
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB  
BLUE  
RED  
MAGENTA  
GREEN  
CYAN  
YELLOW  
WHITE  
Press [ Enter ] KEY  
To exit this subtest and return to the Display Test menu:  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
Press Enter if NO was selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter Menu.  
Press Ctrl + break if YES was selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter  
Menu.  
Subtest 02  
Character Set  
This subtest displays the character codes 00H - FFH, using Mode 01H  
(40*25). The screen below displays when this subtest is executed.  
CHARACTER SET IN 40*25  
Press [Enter] Key  
To exit this subtest and return to the Display Test menu:  
Press Enter if NO was selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter Menu.  
Press Ctrl + break if YES was selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter  
Menu.  
20  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
Subtest 03  
80 * 25 Character Display  
This subtest uses 80*25 video resolution to display character codes 20H -  
7EH using Mode 03H (80*25). The data displayed is shifted 1 byte to the left  
for each line as shown below.  
80*25 CHARACTER DISPLAY  
01234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789  
!”#$%&’()*=,.-/0123456789:;Ù?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_’abcdefghIjklmno  
!”#$%&’()*=,.-/0123456789:;Ù?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_’abcdefghIjkl mnop  
”#$%&’()*=,.-/0123456789:;Ù?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_’abcdefghIjklmnopq  
#$%&’()*=,.-/0123456789:;Ù?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_’abcdefghIjklmnopqr  
$%&’()*=,.-/0123456789:;Ù?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_’abcdefghIjklmnopqrs  
%&’()*=,.-/0123456789:;Ù?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_’abcdefghIjklmnopqrst  
&’()*=,.-/0123456789:;Ù?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_’abcdefghIjkl mnopqrstu  
’()*=,.-/0123456789:;Ù?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_’abcdefghIjklmnopqrstuv  
Shifted to the left one letter by one letter.  
23456789:;Ù?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_’abcdef gh I j k l mnopqrst  
3456789:;Ù?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_’abcdef gh I j k l mnopqrst  
456789:;Ù?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_’abcdef gh I j k l mnopqrst  
Press [Enter] KEY  
To exit this subtest and return to the Display Test menu:  
Press Enter if NO was selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter Menu.  
Press Ctrl + break if YES was selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter  
Menu.  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
Subtest 04  
320 * 200 Character Display  
This subtest uses 320*200 video resolution to display green, red and yellow  
followed by cyan, magenta, and white. The screen below shows the displays  
when this subtest is executed.  
320 * 200 GRAPHICS DISPLAY  
COLOR SET 0 : [ 4 ]  
GREEN  
CYAN  
RED  
MAGENTA  
YELLOW  
WHITE  
Press ENTER to display the following sixteen colors: black, blue, green, cyan,  
red, magenta, brown, white, dark gray, light blue, light green, light cyan, light  
red, light magenta, yellow, and intensified white.  
22  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
320*200 GRAPHICS DISPLAY : [ D ]  
BLACK  
BLUE  
D GRAY  
L BLUE  
L GREEN  
L CYAN  
GREEN  
CYAN  
RED  
L RED  
MAGENTA  
L MAGENTA  
BROWN  
YELLOW  
WHITE  
I WHITE  
Press [Enter] KEY  
Press ENTER to display 64 gradations of red, green, blue and white on the  
screen  
320*200 GRAPHICS DISPLAY : [ 13 ]  
64 gradations of red are displayed.  
64 gradations of green are displayed.  
64 gradations of blue are displayed.  
64 gradations of white are displayed.  
Press [Enter] KEY  
To exit this subtest and return to the Display Test menu:  
Press Enter if NO was selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter Menu.  
Press Ctrl + break if YES was selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter  
Menu.  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
Subtest 05  
640 * 200 Character Display  
This subtest uses 640*200 video resolution to display three windows, each  
window drives a different set of dots: even dots, odd dots and all dots. The  
screen below displays when this subtest is executed.  
640 * 200 GRAPHICS DISPLAY : [ 6 ]  
EVEN DOTS ODD DOTS  
DRIVEN DRIVEN  
ALL DOTS  
DRIVEN  
Press ENTER to display the following 16 colors: black, blue, green, cyan, red,  
magenta, brown, white, dark gray, light blue, light green, light cyan, light red,  
light magenta, yellow, and intensified white.  
640*200 GRAPHICS DISPLAY : [ E ]  
BLACK  
BLUE  
DARK GRAY  
LIGHT BLUE  
LIGHT GREEN  
LIGHT CYAN  
LIGHT RED  
GREEN  
CYAN  
RED  
MAGENTA  
BROWN  
WHITE  
LIGHT MAGENTA  
YELLOW  
INTENSIFIED WHITE  
Press [Enter] KEY  
To exit this subtest and return to the Display Test menu:  
Press Enter if NO was selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter Menu.  
Press Ctrl + break if YES was selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter  
Menu.  
24  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
Subtest 06  
640 * 480 Character Display  
This subtest uses 640*350 video resolution to display 16 colors: black, blue,  
green, cyan, red, magenta, brown, white, dark gray, light blue, light green,  
light cyan, light red, light magenta, yellow, and intensified white. The screen  
below displays when this subtest is executed.  
640*350 GRAPHICS DISPLAY : [10 ]  
BLACK  
BLUE  
DARK GRAY  
LIGHT BLUE  
LIGHT GREEN  
LIGHT CYAN  
LIGHT RED  
GREEN  
CYAN  
RED  
MAGENTA  
BROWN  
WHITE  
LIGHT MAGENTA  
YELLOW  
INTENSIFIED WHITE  
Press [Enter] KEY  
Press ENTER to display the following 16 colors: black, blue, green, cyan, red,  
magenta, brown, white, dark gray, light blue, light green, light cyan, light red,  
light magenta, yellow, and intensified white using 640*480 video resolution.  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
640*480 GRAPHICS DISPLAY : [12 ]  
BLACK  
BLUE  
DARK GRAY  
LIGHT BLUE  
LIGHT GREEN  
LIGHT CYAN  
LIGHT RED  
GREEN  
CYAN  
RED  
MAGENTA  
BROWN  
WHITE  
LIGHT MAGENTA  
YELLOW  
INTENSIFIED WHITE  
Press [Enter] KEY  
To exit this subtest and return to the Display Test menu:  
Press Enter if NO was selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter Menu.  
Press Ctrl + break if YES was selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter  
Menu.  
26  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
Subtest 07  
Display Page  
This subtest displays video pages zero through seven.  
DISPLAY PAGE 0  
000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000  
............................................................0  
0............................................................0  
0............................................................0  
0............................................................0  
0............................................................0  
0............................................................0  
0............................................................0  
0............................................................0  
0............................................................0  
0............................................................0  
0............................................................0  
0............................................................0  
0............................................................0  
0............................................................0  
0............................................................0  
0............................................................0  
0............................................................0  
0............................................................00  
............................................................0  
000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000  
To exit this subtest and return to the Display Test menu:  
Press Enter if NO was selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter Menu.  
Press Ctrl + break if YES was selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter  
Menu.  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
Subtest 08  
"H" Pattern Display  
This subtest displays a full screen of "H" patterns.  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
To exit this subtest and return to the Display Test menu:  
Press Enter if NO was selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter Menu.  
Press Ctrl + break if YES was selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter  
Menu.  
Subtest 9  
Video DAC Register W/R/C  
This subtest writes data patterns to the Video DAC register lookup table (PEL  
Address register), then reads the new data, and compares the result to the  
original data patterns. The original content of the Video DAC register is saved  
in RAM and restored after the test is completed.  
The test data patterns are 00H,15H, 2AH and 3FH.  
NOTE: If NO is selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter menu,  
Screen will remain blankdisplays on the screen while the test is  
executing. When the test is complete the Display Test menu displays.  
If YES is selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter menu, “The Screen  
will remain blank” displays on the screen and then the screen flickers due to  
the fast screen refresh while the test is executing. Press Ctrl + break to  
return to the Display Test menu.  
28  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
Subtest 10  
Color Graphics Display  
This subtest displays three colors, cyan, white and yellow on the screen as  
shown below.  
640 * 480 GRAPHICS DISPLAY  
CYAN  
WHITE  
YELLOW  
To exit this subtest and return to the Display Test menu:  
Press Enter if NO was selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter Menu.  
Press Ctrl + break if YES was selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter  
Menu.  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
Subtest 11  
Color Attributes Display  
This subtest displays 16 colors: black, blue, green, cyan, red, magenta, brown,  
white, dark gray, light blue, light green, light cyan, light red, light magenta,  
yellow, and intensified white. The screen below displays when this subtest is  
executed.  
640*480 COLOR ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY  
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F  
Press [Enter] Key  
Pressing Enter executes VRAM mapping test which indicates vertical lines  
Press Enter to execute the VRAM mapping test which displays a horizontal  
line at one dot intervals using Mode 12.  
30  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
NOTE: The following screen does not display correctly. It will be  
amended in the next version.  
Press [Enter] Key  
Press Enter to execute the VRAM mapping test which displays a vertical line  
at four dot intervals using Mode 12.  
Press [Enter] Key  
Press Enter to display VRAM mapping test using the all dots Mode.  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
Press [Enter] Key  
To exit this subtest and return to the Display Test menu:  
Press Enter if NO was selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter Menu.  
Press Ctrl + break if YES was selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter  
Menu.  
32  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
Subtest 12  
Color Tiling  
This subtest displays black, gray, white, and 3 gradations of red, green, and  
blue as shown in the following display.  
Black  
Gray  
Red  
Green  
Blue  
Red  
Gradation  
Green  
Gradation  
Blue  
Gradation  
White  
Red  
Gradation  
Green  
Gradation  
Blue  
Gradation  
To exit this subtest and return to the Display Test menu:  
Press Enter if NO was selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter Menu.  
Press Ctrl + break if YES was selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter  
Menu.  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
3.8 Floppy Disk Test  
CAUTION: Before running the floppy disk test, prepare a formatted work disk. Remove  
the diagnostics disk and insert the work disk into the FDD. The contents of the floppy disk  
will be erased.  
To execute the Floppy Disk Test select 05 from the Diagnostic Test Menu, press Enter and  
follow the directions on the screen. The Floppy Disk Test contains five subtests that test the  
FDD. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to execute and press Enter.  
Subtest 01  
Subtest 02  
Sequential Read  
This subtest sequentially reads all the tracks (Tracks 0 to 79)on the floppy  
disk.  
Sequential W/R/C  
This subtest continuously writes the data pattern B5ADADh to all the  
specified tracks selected in Subtest 01. The data pattern is then read and  
compared to the original data.  
Subtest 03  
Random Address/Data  
This subtest writes random data to random addresses on all tracks defined in  
Subtest 01. The data is then read and compared to the original data.  
34  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
Subtest 04  
Write Specified Address  
NOTE: The first two digits of the ADDRESS indicate which track is being  
tested, the next two digits indicates the head, and the last two digits  
indicate the sector.  
This subtest allows you to verify the errors from Subtest 02. It writes specified  
data to a specified track and head. Use the Log Utilities (see Section 3.21) to  
specify the track number and head number where the error(s) occurred during  
Subtest 02. The following message displays on the screen to enter the test  
data, track number, and head number.  
TEST DATA ??  
TRACK NO (00~79) ??  
HEAD NO (0~1) ?  
Subtest 05  
Read Specified Address  
This subtest reads data from a specified track and head.  
The following message displays on the screen to enter the test track number  
and head number.  
TRACK NO (00~79) ??  
HEAD NO (0~1) ?  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
3.9 Hard Disk Test  
To execute the Hard Disk Test select 06 from the Diagnostic Test Menu, press Enter and  
follow the directions on the screen. The Hard Disk Test contains eight subtests that test the  
functions of the hard disk drive. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to execute  
and press Enter.  
NOTES: The contents of the hard disk will be erased when subtest 02, 03, 04, 05, 07 or 08  
is executed. Before running the test, transfer the contents of the hard disk to other disk.  
A password is necessary to execute the Hard Disk Test. The password is: hard disk  
Subtest 01  
Subtest 02  
Sequential Read  
This subtest sequentially reads all the tracks on the HDD starting at track 0.  
When all tracks have been read, the test starts at the maximum track and reads  
sequentially back to track 0.  
Address Uniqueness (This subtest need very long time)  
This subtest writes unique address data to each sector of the HDD track-by-  
track. The data written to each sector is then read and compared with the  
original data. There are three ways the HDD can be read:  
Forward sequential  
Reverse sequential  
Random  
Subtest 03  
Random Address Data  
This subtest writes random data to 1000 different random addresses on the  
HDD. This data is then read and compared to the original data.  
36  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
Subtest 04  
Cross Talk and Peak Shift  
This subtest writes eight of the most likely to fail data patterns (shown below)  
to a cylinder on the HDD, then reads the data while moving from cylinder to  
cylinder.  
Data Pattern  
B5ADADH  
4A5252H  
EB6DB6H  
149249H  
63B63BH  
9C49C4H  
2DB6DBH  
D24924H  
Subtest 05  
Write Specified Address  
NOTE: This subtest is designed to run with the Test Loop set to NO. This  
subtest is a debug tool and the operator should enter the Test Parameters  
each time.  
.
This subtest allows you to verify the errors from Subtest 01. It writes specified  
data to a specified LBA. Use the Log Utilities (see Section 3.18) to specify the  
LBA number where the error(s) occurred during Subtest 01. The following  
message displays on the screen to enter the test data, and Sector count.  
TEST DATA  
??  
SECTOR COUNT (01~39) ??  
START ADDRESS (00000000~MAX Address) ?  
Subtest 06  
Read Specified Address  
NOTE: This subtest is designed to run with the Test Loop set to NO. This  
subtest is a debug tool and the operator should enter the Test Parameters  
each time.  
This subtest allows you to verify the errors from Subtest 01. It reads specified  
data (Subtest 06) from a specified LBA. Use the Log Utilities (see Section  
3.18) to specify the LBA number where the error(s) occurred during Subtest  
01. The following message displays on the screen to enter the test sector  
count.  
SECTOR COUNT (01~39) ??  
START ADDRESS (00000000~MAX Address) ?  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
Subtest 07  
Subtest 08  
Sequential Write  
This subtest writes specified data to all cylinders on the HDD. The following  
message displays on the screen to enter the test data.  
TEST DATA ????(=37b3H)  
W-R-C Specified Address  
This subtest writes specified data to a specified sector count, then reads and  
compares the result. The following message displays on the screen to enter the  
test data, sector count.  
TEST DATA ????(=37b3H)  
SECTOR COUNT (01~39) ??  
START ADDRESS (00000000~Max Address) ?  
38  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
3.10 Real Time Clock Test  
To execute the Real Time Clock Test select 07 from the Diagnostic Test Menu, press Enter  
and follow the directions on the screen. The Real Time Clock Test contains three subtests  
that test the computer’s real time functions. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to  
execute and press Enter.  
Subtest 01  
Real Time  
This subtest allows you to change the date and time. To execute the Real Time  
Subtest, follow these steps:  
1. Select Subtest 01 and the following displays:  
[ REAL TIME TEST ]  
Current date : mm-dd-yyyy  
Current time : hh:mm:ss  
Enter new date : mm-dd-yyyy  
Enter new time : hh:mm:ss  
Press [Enter] key to exit test  
2. If the current date is not correct, enter the correct date at the "Enter new  
date" prompt and press Enter. The following prompt displays:  
Enter new time :  
3. If the current time is not correct, enter the correct time using a 24-hour  
format and press Enter.  
NOTE: If NO is selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter menu, the  
Real Time Clock Test menu displays.  
If YES is selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter menu, the screen  
above displays and the test is executed again. Press Ctrl + break to return  
to the Real Time Clock Test menu.  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
Subtest 02  
Subtest 03  
Backup Memory  
This subtest writes 50 bytes of test data (FFH, AAH, 55H, and 00H) to the  
CMOS 14th address, then reads the new data and compares it to the original  
data.  
Real Time Carry  
CAUTION: When this subtest is executed, the current date and time are  
reset.  
This subtest checks the clock’s carry function.  
[ REAL TIME CARRY TEST ]  
Current date : 12-31-1999  
Current time : 23:59:55  
Press [Enter] key to exit test  
The following is the display after the date carry function is executed.  
[ REAL TIME CARRY TEST ]  
Current date : 01-01-2000  
Current time : 00:00:01  
Press [Enter] key to exit test  
To exit this subtest and return to the Real Time Clock menu:  
Press Enter if NO was selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter Menu.  
Press Ctrl + break if YES was selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter  
Menu.  
40  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
3.11 Cache Memory Test  
To execute the Cache Memory Test select 08 from the Diagnostic Test Menu, press Enter  
and follow the directions on the screen. The Cache Memory Test contains eight subtests that  
test the computer's cache memory. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to execute  
and press Enter.  
NOTE: If NO is selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter menu, the screen will  
remain blank while the subtest is executing. When the test is complete the Cache Memory  
Test menu displays.  
If YES is selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter menu, the Test Status screen  
displays while the subtest is executing. Press Ctrl + break to return to the Cache Memory  
Test menu.  
Subtest 01  
Subtest 02  
Constant Data Test  
This subtest reads the contents of cache memory and saves it into RAM. The  
subtest then writes constant data (FFFFH, AAAAH, 5555H, 0101H, 0000H),  
reads the new data and compares the result with the original data pattern. The  
original cache memory content is then restored to the cache memory.  
Address Pattern Test  
This subtest reads the contents of cache memory and saves it into RAM. The  
subtest then writes address data patterns (0000H, 0001H, 0002H, through  
3FFDH, 3FFEH, 3FFFH), reads the new data and compares the result with the  
original data. The original cache memory content is then restored to the cache  
memory.  
Subtest 03  
Increment/Decrement Test  
This subtest reads the contents of cache memory and saves it into RAM. The  
subtest then writes the increment data (00H, 01H, 02H, through FDH, FEH,  
FFH), reads the new data and compares the result with the original data. After  
comparing the incremental data, decrement data (FFH, FEH, FEH, through  
02H, 01H, 00H) is written and the new data is read and compared with the  
original data. The original cache memory content is then restored to the cache  
memory.  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
Subtest 04  
Subtest 05  
Subtest 06  
Bit Shift Pattern Test  
This subtest reads the contents of cache memory and saves it into RAM. The  
subtest then writes the bit shift data patterns (1 bit shifted every 4 bytes), reads  
the new data and compares the result with the original data. The original  
cache memory content is then restored to the cache memory.  
Write Disturb Test (We can’t support this time)  
This subtest reads the contents of cache memory and saves it into RAM. The  
subtest then writes the “write disturb data,” reads the new data and compares  
the result with the original data. The original cache memory content is then  
restored to the cache memory.  
Checker Board Test  
This subtest reads the contents of cache memory and saves it into RAM. The  
subtest then writes the “checker board data,” (data which is inverted  
front/back and left/right) reads the new data and compares the result with the  
original data. The original cache memory content is then restored to the cache  
memory.  
Subtest 07  
Subtest 08  
Marching Test  
This subtest reads the contents of cache memory and saves it into RAM. The  
subtest then writes the “marching data,” (00H through 01H and 01H through  
00H) reads the new data and compares the result with the original data. The  
original cache memory content is then restored to the cache memory.  
Working Data Test  
This subtest reads the contents of cache memory and saves it into RAM. The  
subtest then writes the “working data,” reads the new data and compares the  
result with the original data. The original cache memory content is then  
restored to the cache memory.  
42  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
3.12 High Resolution Display Test  
To execute the High Resolution Display Test select 09 from the Diagnostic Test Menu, press  
Enter and follow the directions on the screen. The High Resolution Display Test contains six  
subtests that test the computer's high resolution video display. Move the highlight bar to the  
subtest you want to execute and press Enter.  
Subtest 01  
VRAM W/R/C Test  
This subtest writes address and data patterns to Video RAM, then reads the  
values from the Video RAM and compares them to the original test patterns.  
During the execution of this test 13 different color screens display: black,  
green, green, blue, blue, red, red, red, black, white, pink, cyan, and black.  
Test Process:  
1. Sets the video display to 1024*768 mode  
2. Bank change test  
Writes 1 byte data in order 0, 1, through Fh, and compares the result,  
at every bank, to the original data patterns.  
3. Bit shift data test  
Writes 01h data into addresses A000:0000h through A000:FFFFh for  
each bank, reads the new data and, then compares the results with the  
original data. Data is then shifted 1 bit to the left, and all bits (01h,  
02h, 04h, 08h, through 80h) are tested again.  
4. Fixed data test  
Writes test data (in order FFh, AAh, 55h, 00h) into addresses  
A000:0000h through A000:FFFFh for each bank by, reads the new  
data and, then compares the results with the original data. Data is then  
shifted 1 bit to the left, and all bits are tested again  
NOTE: If NO is selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter menu, the  
screen displays the colors listed above and then the High Resolution  
Display Test menu displays.  
If YES is selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter menu, the screen  
displays the colors listed above. Press Ctrl + break to return to the High  
Resolution Display Test menu.  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
Subtest 02  
640*480 Mode Display  
This subtest uses 640*480 video resolution to display a high resolution white  
frame, 256 letter types (8*16 pixels) and 64 gradations of white, red, green,  
and blue as shown below.  
Press [ Enter ]key  
[ 640*480 256 ]  
256 letter  
types  
indication  
0---+---1---+---2---+---3---+---4---+---5---+---6---  
64 gradations  
WHITE  
RED  
64 gradations  
64 gradations  
GREEN  
BLUE  
64 gradations  
To exit this subtest and return to the High Resolution Display Test menu:  
Press Enter if NO was selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter Menu.  
Press Ctrl + break if YES was selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter  
Menu.  
44  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
Subtest 03  
800 * 600 Mode Display  
This subtest uses 800*600 video resolution to display a high resolution white  
frame, 256 letter types (8*16 pixels) and 256 gradations of white, red, green,  
and blue as shown below.  
Press [ Enter ] key  
[ 800*600 256 ]  
256 letter types  
indication  
0---+---1---+---2---+---3---+---4---+---5---+---6---  
64 gradations  
64 gradations  
64 gradations  
WHITE  
RED  
GREEN  
BLUE  
64 gradations  
To exit this subtest and return to the High Resolution Display Test menu:  
Press Enter if NO was selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter Menu.  
Press Ctrl + break if YES was selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter  
Menu  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
Subtest 04  
1024* 768 Mode Display  
This subtest uses 1024*768 video resolution to display a high resolution white  
frame, 256 letter types (8*16 pixels) and 64 gradations of white, red, green,  
and blue as shown below.  
Press [ Enter ] key  
[ 1024*768 256 ]  
256 letter types  
indication  
0---+---1---+---2---+---3---+---4---+---5---+---6---  
WHITE  
RED  
64 gradations  
64 gradations  
64 gradations  
64 gradations  
GREEN  
BLUE  
To exit this subtest and return to the High Resolution Display Test menu:  
Press Enter if NO was selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter Menu.  
Press Ctrl + break if YES was selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter  
Menu.  
46  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
Subtest 05  
“H” Pattern Display  
This subtest uses the 1024*768 Mode to display a high resolution white  
frame, “H” letters (8*16 pixels fonts), at 128 letters by 48 lines.  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH  
To exit this subtest and return to the High Resolution Display Test menu:  
Press Enter if NO was selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter Menu.  
Press Ctrl + break if YES was selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter  
Menu.  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
Subtest 06  
Focus Test ( “E” Pattern)  
This subtest sets the 1024*768 Mode and displays “E” patterns (18*18 dot  
fonts), at 56 letters *42 lines surrounded by a high resolution white frame.  
To exit this subtest and return to the High Resolution Display Test menu:  
Press Enter if NO was selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter Menu.  
Press Ctrl + break if YES was selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter  
Menu.  
48  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
3.13 Multimedia Test  
To execute the Multimedia Test select 10 from the Diagnostic Test Menu, press Enter and  
follow the directions on the screen. The Multimedia Test contains four subtests that test the  
computer's multimedia functions. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to execute  
and press Enter.  
NOTE: Use the Toshiba Backup CD-ROM for Subtests 01, 02, and 03.  
Subtest 01  
Sequential Read Test  
This subtest sequentially reads one block unit (2K bytes) of all logical  
addresses from the test CD.  
NOTE: If NO is selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter Menu, the  
screen will remain blank while the subtest is executing. When the test is  
complete the Multimedia Test menu displays.  
If YES is selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter Menu, the Test  
Status screen displays while the subtest is executing. Press Ctrl + break to  
return to the Multimedia Test menu.  
Subtest 02  
Subtest 03  
Random Read Test  
This subtest randomly reads all addresses.  
Read Specified Address Test  
This subtest reads data from a specified block of addresses.  
The following message displays on the screen to enter the start and end block  
addresses:  
START BLOCK ADDRESS ?  
END BLOCK ADDRESS ?  
Subtest 04  
1 Point W/R/C (R/RW Media)  
NOTE: Use CD-R or CD-RW, the CD-ROM and DVD cannot be used for  
this subtest, and some DVD-dual can’t support this test.  
This subtest writes specified data to a specified block count, then reads and  
compares the result.  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
3.14 MEMORY2 Test  
To execute the Expansion Test select 11 from the Diagnostic Test Menu, press Enter and  
follow the directions on the screen. The MEMORY2 Test contains four subtests that test the  
computer's. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to execute and press Enter.  
NOTE: If NO is selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter menu, the Test Status  
screen displays while the test is executing. When the test is complete the Memory Test  
menu displays.  
If YES is selected for Test Loop on the Test Parameter menu, the Test Status screen  
displays while the test is executing. Press Ctrl + break to return to the Memory Test menu  
Subtest 01  
All one/All zero test  
This subtest performs pseudorandom data read/write. The data consists of “all  
ones”/”all zero” patterns produced by pseudorandom sequence generator. The  
test checks address error.  
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000000000000000  
0000000000000000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF  
Subtest 02  
Walking 1/Walking 0 test (Left)  
This subtest uses “running one”/”running zero” patterns. This test sequence  
allows also to checking system bus in maximum noise conditions. The  
following test sequence is written.  
7FFF7FFF7FFF7FFF8000800080008000  
BFFFBFFFBFFFBFFF4000400040004000  
After all the memory being tested is filled with the pattern, it is read in  
descanting direction and compared with reference data. As the memory is  
read, the data is replaced with inverse test pattern. After all the memory is  
read and replaced with inverted pattern, it is read in descanting direction and  
compare with new reference data. As the memory is read, the data is replaced  
with next pattern, which is like first one shifted to right.  
Subtest 03  
Walking 1/Walking 0 test (Right)  
Tee test method is the same as Subtest2. However, the data to be used differs.  
80008000800080007FFF7FFF7FFF7FFF  
4000400040004000BFFFBFFFBFFFBFFF  
Subtest 04  
Walking 1/Walking 0 test (Left/ Right)  
50  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
Tee test method is the same as Subtest2. However, the data to be used differs.  
7FFF7FFF7FFF7FFF8000800080008000  
BFFFBFFFBFFFBFFF4000400040004000  
DFFFDFFFDFFFDFFF2000200020002000  
FFFBFFFBFFFBFFFB0004000400040004  
FFFDFFFDFFFDFFFD0002000200020002  
FFFEFFFEFFFEFFFE0001000100010001  
80008000800080007FFF7FFF7FFF7FFF  
4000400040004000BFFFBFFFBFFFBFFF  
0004000400040004FFFBFFFBFFFBFFFB  
0002000200020002FFFDFFFDFFFDFFFD  
0001000100010001FFFEFFFEFFFEFFFE  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
3.15 Error Codes and Error Status Names  
The following table lists the error codes and error status names for the Diagnostic Tests.  
Table 3-2 Error codes and error status names (1/2)  
Device Name  
(Common)  
Error Code  
Error Status Name  
Data Compare Error  
FF  
02  
??  
01  
02  
03  
04  
06  
08  
09  
0C  
10  
20  
40  
80  
??  
Memory  
Protected Mode Not Changed  
Other Error  
FDD  
Bad Command Error  
Address Mark Not Found  
Write Protected  
Record Not Found  
Media Change Line Error  
DMA Overrun Error  
DMA Boundary Error  
Select Media Error  
CRC Error  
FDC Error  
Seek Error  
Time Out Error  
Other Error  
HDD  
01  
02  
04  
05  
07  
09  
0A  
0B  
10  
11  
20  
40  
80  
AA  
Bad Command Error  
Bad Address Mark Error  
Record Not Found  
HDC Not Reset Error  
Drive Not Initialized  
DMA Boundary Error  
Bad Sector  
Bad Track Error  
ECC Error  
ECC Recover Enabled  
HDC Error  
Seek Error  
Time Out Error  
Drive Not Ready  
52  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
Table 3-2 Error codes and error status names (2/2)  
Device Name  
HDD  
Error Code  
Error Status Name  
Undefined Error  
BB  
CC  
E0  
F0  
??  
02  
03  
??  
Write Fault  
Status Error  
No Sense Error  
Other Error  
Cache Memory  
Multimedia  
Protect Mode Error  
Caching Error  
Other Error  
01  
0F  
15  
??  
Write Error  
Invalid Drive  
Drive Not Ready  
Other Error  
NOTE: If error status name is Other Error , please reference the Error Code for error  
information  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
3.16 Running Test  
NOTES:  
1. You may add or delete subtests using the Running Test Edit Item function, see Section  
3.20.  
2. Do not forget to insert a work disk in the FDD. If a work disk is not inserted an error  
will be generated during the Floppy Disk Test.  
3. If the test completes successfully an “PASS” sign with blue letters displays on the  
screen.  
4. If the test fails or is interrupted before completion an “FAIL” sign with red letters  
displays on the screen.  
5. If running item not select an “NOITEM” sign with green letters display on the screen.  
6. All errors which occur during execution of the Running Test are logged in the Log  
File.  
7. This program is executed according to the Count Loop number selected in the  
Running Test Edit Item, see Section 3.20. To terminate the program, press Ctrl +  
Break.  
54  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
3.17 DMI INFOEMATION  
Select 03 from the Diagnostics Menu and press Enter to Check or Write DMI Information  
Data:  
3.17.1 Check DMI Information  
The Check DMI Configuration program contains the following configuration information for  
the computer:  
NOTE: Please set the media of DVD before starting a test.  
System information (Type 1)  
1. Manufacture : TOSHIBA  
2. Product Name : Satellite XXXXXX  
3. Version  
:(TOSHIBA Part Number)  
4. Serial Number : Serial Number  
5. UUID Number: xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
OEM Strings (Type 11)  
1. OEM String : xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
On Board LAN MAC  
1. MAC ADR : xxxxxxxxxxxx  
DVD Region Code  
1. User Change Time : X  
2. Region Code  
: X  
3.17.2 Write DMI Information  
The Write DMI Information program contains the following information for the computer :  
1. Manufacture Name ( TOSHIBA )  
2. Product Name ( Satellite XXXXXX )  
3. Part Number ( PSL20X-XXXXXX )  
4. Serial Number ( 12345678W )  
5. OEM String ( PSL20X-XXXXX,SXXXXXXXXXX )  
6. Write UUID ( XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX )  
7. Brightness Write ( XXXXXXXX )  
Select 1 ~ 7 to keyin new data , select 8 to exit program , program will compare input data  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
length with the max length , if over will retry keyin  
Note : Please Check New DMI Information After System Restart !!  
1. **** Manufacture Name ( TOSHIBA ) - (15)  
2. **** Product Name ( Satellite XXXXXX ) - (31)  
3. **** Part Number ( PSL20X-XXXXXX ) - (15)  
4. **** Serial Number ( 12345678W ) - (9)  
5. **** OEM String ( PSL20X-XXXXX,SXXXXXXXXXX ) - (31)  
6. **** Write UUID ( XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX ) – (16)  
7. **** Brightness Write ( XXXXXXXX ) – (8)  
8. **** Exit  
Please Select (1 ~ 7) To Modify DMI String :  
Current Data of EEPROM : Toshiba  
1. Enter the Manufacture Name : TOSHIBA  
Your Keyin is  
EEPROM return : TOSHIBA  
: TOSHIBA  
…… This is your keyin data  
……. This is read from eeprom back  
Press any key to continue  
Note : Please Check New DMI Information After System Restart !!  
If Keyin length too long will retry :  
Current Data of EEPROM : 12345678W  
4. Enter the Serial Number : 12345678901234  
Your Keyin String Length Not Correct 14 > 9 !!!  
Current Data of EEPROM : 12345678W  
4. Enter the Serial Number :  
56  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
3.18 Log Utilities  
This function logs error information generated while a test is in progress and stores the  
results in RAM (Maximum error log : 500 times). This function can store data on a floppy  
disk. If the power switch is turned off, the error information will be lost. Error information is  
displayed in the following order:  
1. Error count (CNT)  
2. Test name and subtest number (TEST)  
3. Pass count (PASS)  
4. Error status (STS)  
5. FDD/HDD or memory address (ADDR)  
6. Write data (WD)  
7. Read data (RD)  
8. Error Name ( ERROR NAME/DETAILS)  
3.18.1 Operations  
1. Select 04 and press Enter in the Diagnostics Menu to log error information into RAM  
or onto a floppy disk. Error information is displayed in the following format:  
XXXX ERRORS  
PASSCOUNT = XXXX  
CNT TEST  
PASS STS ADDR  
WD RD ERROR NAME/DETAILS  
001 FDD 02 0000 180 0000001 00 00 WRITE PROTECTED  
002 FDD 01 0000 120 0000001 00 00 TIME OUT ERROR  
Address  
Error Status  
Pass Count  
Subtest Number  
Test Name  
Error Count  
[[1:Next, 2:Prev, 3:Exit, 4;Clear, 5:FD Log Read, 6:FD Log Write, 7:Log Save]]  
Read Data  
Write Data  
Error Name and Detail  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
2. Error information displayed on the screen can be manipulated with the following  
number keys:  
The 1 key scrolls the display to the next page.  
The 2 key scrolls the display to the previous page.  
The 3 key returns to the Diagnostics Menu.  
The 4 key erases all error log information in RAM.  
The 5 key reads the log information from a floppy disk.  
The 6 key writes the log information to a floppy disk.  
The 7 key save the log information to a floppy disk.  
The following are the test abbreviations for each Diagnostics Test.  
Test Name  
System Test  
Test Abbreviations  
ROM  
Memory Test  
RAM  
Keyboard Test  
KBD  
Display Test  
CRT  
Floppy Disk Test  
Hard Disk Test  
FDD  
HDD  
Real Time Clock Test  
Cache Memory Test  
Height Resolution Display Test  
Multimedia Test  
Memory2 Test  
RTM  
CAH  
KIF  
MLT  
RAM  
58  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
3.19 System Configuration  
Select 05 from the Diagnostics Menu and press Enter to display the following system  
configuration:  
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION :  
* - BIOS VER = VX.XX KBC VER = XXXX  
* - MAC ADDRESS : XXXXXXXXXXXX  
* - 0 ASYNC ADAPTER  
* - 1 HDD DRIVE(S):XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
FW Rev.:XXXXXXXX  
CUR LBA:XXXXXXXX ORG LBA:XXXXXXXX  
* - BATTERY TYPE:XXXXXXXXXX  
* - XXXMB MEMORY SIZE  
* - XXX CPU  
* - 1 Vedio Chip XXXXXXXXXXXXX  
* - 1 ODD DRIVE(S):XXXXXXXX  
FW Rev.:XXXX  
Press Enter to return to the Diagnostics Menu.  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
3.20  
Running Test Edit Item  
3.20.1 Function Description  
Function description lets you add or delete the subtests used to execute the Running Test.  
The following screen displays after pressing the Tab key to edit an item in the Running Test.  
KEY OPERATION  
Ð
Ï
Cursor Down  
Cursor Up  
PgDn Page Down  
PgUp Page Up  
Home Top of ITEM  
End End of ITEM  
Ins Insert ITEM  
Del Delete ITEM  
Enter End  
3.20.2 Operation Description  
Select 05 from the Diagnostics Menu and press Enter to display the following:  
Test Item Editor  
[RUNNING TEST]  
Loop Count (1-65535, 0 = infinity) 00000  
Error Stop NO  
Subtest Name  
T-No  
01  
02  
02  
02  
02  
04  
04  
04  
04  
04  
04  
04  
04  
05  
08  
08  
Test Name  
S-No  
System Test  
Memory Test  
Memory Test  
Memory Test  
Memory Test  
Display Test  
Display Test  
Display Test  
Display Test  
Display Test  
Display Test  
Display Test  
Display Test  
Floppy Disk Test  
Hard Disk Test  
Subtest 01 ROM Checksum  
Subtest 01 Conventional Memory  
Subtest 02 Protect Mode  
Subtest 03 Protect Mode (32MB Max)  
Subtest 04 RAM Refresh  
Subtest 01 VRAM W/R/C  
Subtest 02 Character Attribute Set  
Subtest 03 Character Set  
Subtest 04 80 * 25 Character Display  
Subtest 05 320 * 200 Graphics Display  
Subtest 06 640 * 200 Graphics Display  
Subtest 07 640 * 480 Graphics Display  
Subtest 08 Display Page  
Subtest 02 Sequential W/R/C  
Subtest 01 Sequential Read  
Real Time Clock Test Subtest 02 Backup Memory Test  
Tab: HELP (Key Operation)  
60  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
1. Enter a number or 0 for Loop Count and press Enter.  
Select a number from 1 to 65535 to define the number of times the Running Test  
executes.  
Select 0 to run the test continuously until halted by the user.  
2. Select the NO or YES for Error Stop and press Enter.  
Select NO to keep the test running even if an error is found.  
Select YES to stop the test program when an error is found.  
NOTE: All errors which occur during execution of the Running Test are logged  
in the Log File.  
3. Press Insert to add a subtest.  
4. Press Delete to remove the selected subtest.  
5. Press Enter when you have finished editing the Running Test list.  
6. The following message displays:  
Do you want to save the data?  
Save to disk  
Do not save  
7. Select the option and press Enter.  
8. Select 03 from the Diagnostics Menu and press Enter to execute the Running Test.  
NOTE: If press Ctrl+break in the runin process, please press more one any key  
to exit.  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
3.21 Common Tests and Operation  
3.21.1 How to operate a window  
To input parameters, or open a window use the following keys.  
key : to move a highlight bar  
[Enter] key  
[Esc] key  
: to select an item at the highlight bar  
: to close the current window and go back to the previous  
window  
3.21.2 How to Stop the Test Program  
To stop a test:  
[Ctrl]+[Break] Press the Ctrl key and the Break key simultaneously.  
3.21.3 Test Status Screen  
NOTE: The Test Status Screen does not display during all the tests. See the specific test  
description Sections 3.4 through 3.14.  
The following Test Status screen displays during most tests. See the description of each test  
Sections 3.4 through 3.14 for specific screen information.  
Test Name  
Sub Test  
Pass Count :00000  
Write Data :00  
:0101  
Error Count :00000  
Read Data  
:00  
Address  
:00000000 Status  
:00  
Test Name  
Subtest No.  
Displays the name of the test being executed.  
Displays the Subtest number in the following format:  
ffgg  
ff = Subtest No.  
gg= Step Number (Will be blank if the test does not have a  
Step Number.)  
62  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
Pass Count  
Error Count  
Write Data  
Displays the number of times the test has been executed.  
Displays the number of errors which have occurred during the test.  
Displays only the test data that has failed to compare during the  
test while being written during the test.  
Read Data  
Displays test data that has failed to compare during the test while  
being read during the test.  
Test Address  
Error Status  
Error Name  
Displays the Test Address. (The format differs for each test.)  
Displays the error status.  
Displays the name of the error.  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test Program for Field.  
3.21.4 Test Stop Display  
If an error occurs during a Subtest and YES is selected for Error Stop, the following message  
displays:  
[HALT OPERATION]  
1.Test end  
2.Continue  
3.Retry  
* Select 1, 2, or 3  
The three selections have the following functions:  
1: Terminates the test program and exits to the subtest menu.  
2: Continues the test from the error.  
3: Restarts the test from the beginning.  
Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired option and press Enter.  
3.21.5 How to enter data  
Letters which must be entered are always shown in [ ]. Simultaneous entries are displayed  
by a “+” mark. For example:  
[a] [Enter]  
Press the “a” key, then press the [Enter] key.  
[Ctrl] + [c]  
Press the [Ctrl] key and the “c” key simultaneously.  
64  
Satellite P100 and Satellite Pro P100 Tests and Diagnostics Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
Replacement Procedures  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
4-i  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
4
4-ii  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
Chapter 4  
Contents  
4.1  
Overview.................................................................................................................... 4-1  
Safety Precautions................................................................................................ 4-2  
Before You Begin ................................................................................................ 4-3  
Disassembly Procedure........................................................................................ 4-4  
Assembly Procedure ............................................................................................ 4-5  
Tools and Equipment........................................................................................... 4-5  
Screw Tightening Torque .................................................................................... 4-6  
Grip Color............................................................................................................ 4-6  
Screw Notation..................................................................................................... 4-7  
Battery pack ............................................................................................................... 4-8  
PC card..................................................................................................................... 4-10  
HDD......................................................................................................................... 4-12  
Wireless LAN card .................................................................................................. 4-16  
Memory module....................................................................................................... 4-18  
Keyboard.................................................................................................................. 4-21  
LED Board............................................................................................................... 4-24  
Optical disk drive..................................................................................................... 4-26  
4.2  
4.3  
4.4  
4.5  
4.6  
4.7  
4.8  
4.9  
4.10 Display assembly ..................................................................................................... 4-28  
4.11 Bluetooth assembly.................................................................................................. 4-33  
4.12 Cover assembly........................................................................................................ 4-38  
4.13 Touch pad................................................................................................................. 4-40  
4.14 Audio board ............................................................................................................ 4-40  
4.15 Fingerprint board ..................................................................................................... 4-41  
4.16 USB board................................................................................................................ 4-42  
4.17 System board............................................................................................................4-45  
4.18 CPU..........................................................................................................................4-47  
4.19 VGA heat sink..........................................................................................................4-50  
4.20 LCD unit / FL inverter............................................................................................. 4-52  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
4-iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
Figures  
Figure 4-1 Removing the battery pack................................................................................. 4-8  
Figure 4-2-1 Removing a PC card ...................................................................................... 4-10  
Figure 4-3-2 Insert a PC card............................................................................................. 4-11  
Figure 4-4 Removing the HDD assembly.......................................................................... 4-13  
Figure 4-4 Removing a HDD............................................................................................. 4-14  
Figure 4-5 Removing a wireless LAN card....................................................................... 4-16  
Figure 4-6 Removing a memory module........................................................................... 4-19  
Figure 4-7 Insert a memory module.................................................................................... 4-20  
Figure 4-8 Removing screws for KBD cover/keyboard ..................................................... 4-22  
Figure 4-9 Removing the keyboard/KBD cover................................................................. 4-22  
Figure 4-10 Removing the Function board.......................................................................... 4-24  
Figure 4-11 Removing an optical disk drive........................................................................ 4-26  
Figure 4-12 Disassembling the side bracket........................................................................ 4-27  
Figure 4-13 Removing the screws (securing display assembly).......................................... 4-28  
Figure 4-14 Removing keyboard cover ............................................................................... 4-29  
Figure 4-15 Removing the Wireless Antenna and Bluetooth.............................................. 4-29  
Figure 4-16 Removing the hinge screw............................................................................... 4-30  
Figure 4-17 Removing the LCD harness and remove display assembly............................. 4-31  
Figure 4-18 Removing the Bluetooth .................................................................................. 4-33  
Figure 4-19 Removing the screws cable from connect (front) ............................................ 4-36  
Figure 4-20 Removing the screws (back)............................................................................ 4-35  
Figure 4-21 Removing the cover assembly ......................................................................... 4-36  
Figure 4-22 Removing the touch pad................................................................................... 4-38  
Figure 4-23 Removing the Audio Board ............................................................................. 4-40  
Figure 4-24 Removing the Fingerprint ................................................................................ 4-41  
Figure 4-25 Removing the USB board ................................................................................ 4-42  
Figure 4-26 Removing the system board............................................................................. 4-45  
Figure 4-27 Removing the CPU heat sink........................................................................... 4-47  
Figure 4-28 Removing the CPU .......................................................................................... 4-48  
Figure 4-29 Applying silicon grease.................................................................................... 4-49  
Figure 4-30 Removing the VGA heat sink .......................................................................... 4-50  
4-iv  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
Figure 4-31 Removing the display mask ............................................................................. 4-52  
Figure 4-32 Removing the FL inverter................................................................................ 4-53  
Figure 4-33 Removing the LCD unit................................................................................... 4-54  
Figure 4-34 Removing the LCD supports............................................................................ 4-55  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
4-v  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
4
2
4.1 Overview  
This chapter describes the procedure for removing and replacing the field replaceable units  
(FRUs) in the PC. It may not be necessary to remove all the FRUs in order to replace one.  
The chart below provides a guide as to which other FRUs must be removed before a  
particular FRU can be removed. The numbers in the chart indicate the relevant section  
numbers in this manual.  
In all cases when removing an FRU, the battery pack must also be removed. When repairing  
an FRU that is the potential cause of a computer fault, use the chart to determine the order in  
which FRUs need to be removed.  
The tilt stand, if it is installed, can be removed without any other FRUs removed.  
Chart Notation  
The chart shows the case for the  
following example:  
Removing a MDC  
All FRUs down to the “4.2 Battery  
pack” to “4.11 Cover assembly” above  
a SD board/Microphone/MDC must be  
removed.  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
Safety Precautions  
Please read the following safety instructions before disassembling the computer and always  
follow the instructions while working on the computer.  
DANGER: 1. In the case of the battery, always use authentic parts or equivalent parts  
approved by Toshiba. Other batteries may have different specifications  
that are incompatible with the computer and may result in fire or  
explosion.  
Due to the risk of alkali fluid leaks, never attempt to heat or disassemble  
the battery. Similarly, due to the risk of explosion, never expose the  
battery to flame.  
2. Some parts including the power supply and FL inverter generate high  
voltages. If you need to turn on the power while disassembling the  
computer, do not touch any connectors or other components due to the  
risk of electric shock. Also, do not disassemble individual parts when  
performing routine maintenance.  
WARNING: 1. To prevent electric shock, turn off the power unplug the AC adapter  
from the power source.  
2. As the battery installed to the computer is typically already charged, the  
risk of electric shock remains even when the AC adapter is unplugged  
from the socket. To prevent electric shock, always take off any metal  
jewelry or accessories such as necklaces, bracelets or rings before  
working on the computer. Never work with wet or moist hands.  
3. Take care not to injury yourself on any edges or corners.  
CAUTION: 1. Confirm that replacement parts have compatible specifications before  
replacing on the computer. Never use incorrect parts as these may cause  
faults on the computer.  
2. To prevent internal damage such as short circuits or burning, do not  
allow any screws, paper clips, or other metal objects to fall into the  
computer. When removing screws, always replace with the same size  
screw. Ensure that all screws are fully tightened. Loose screws may  
result in short circuits leading to overheating, smoke or flame.  
3. To prevent electric shock, check that you have disconnected all cables  
from a part before removing the part.  
4. When connecting to the AC power supply, use only an AC adapter and  
cable approved by Toshiba.  
5. To prevent electric shock, ensure that all replacement parts are  
compatible with the computer and that all cables and connectors are  
securely connected.  
4-2  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
Before You Begin  
Take note of the following points before starting work. Always remove the AC adapter and  
battery pack before commencing any of the procedures. The procedure for removing the  
battery pack is described in section “4.2.1 Battery Pack”.  
1. Do not disassemble the computer unless it is operating abnormally.  
2. Use the designated tools.  
3. Ensure that the environment for working on and storing parts does not contain any of  
the following.  
Dust or dirt  
Static electricity  
Extremely hot, cold or humid conditions  
4. Perform the diagnostic tests described in Chapter 2 to determine which FRU is the  
cause of the fault.  
5. Do not perform any unnecessary work. Always work in accordance with the  
disassembly and reassembly procedures in this manual.  
6. Keep parts removed from the computer in a safe place away from the computer where  
they will not be damaged or interfere with your work.  
7. Disassembling requires the removal of a large number of screws. Keep removed  
screws in a safe place such that you can determine which screws belong to which part.  
8. When reassembling, ensure that you use the correct screws and fit parts in the correct  
position. Screw sizes are noted in the text and figures.  
9. As all parts have sharp edges and corners, take care not to cut yourself.  
10. After replacing an FRU, check that the computer and replaced part operate correctly.  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
Disassembly Procedure  
Three main types of cable connector are used.  
Pressure plate connector  
Spring connector  
Normal pin connector  
When disconnecting a pressure plate connector, lift up the tag on one side of the plastic  
pressure plate on the connector and pull the cable out from the connector. When reconnecting  
a cable to a pressure plate connector, lift up the pressure plate to a suitable height and insert  
the cable into the connector. Press down on both sides of the pressure plate such that both  
sides of the plate and connector are at the same height and that the cable is fixed in the  
correct position. Pull the cable to ensure that it is securely connected. If the cable is  
disconnected from the connector, reconnect it making sure that you lift the pressure plate  
high enough to insert fully the cable.  
For spring connectors, lifting up the stopper frees the cable and allows it to be pulled out. To  
reconnect, hold the stopper in the up position and insert the cable, then lower the stopper to  
secure the cable.  
Normal pin connectors are used for all other cables. Simply pull out or push in these  
connectors to disconnect or reconnect.  
Pressure plate connector  
Spring connector  
4-4  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
Assembly Procedure  
After the computer has been disassembled and the part that caused the fault has been repaired  
or replaced, the computer must be reassembled.  
Take note of the following general points when assembling the computer.  
Take your time and follow the instructions carefully. Hurrying the assembly work  
will only introduce new problems.  
Check that all cables and connectors are securely connected.  
Before fastening FRUs or other parts in place, ensure that no cables are caught on  
screws or the FRU.  
Check that all latches are securely closed.  
Ensure that you have installed all FRUs correctly and do not have any screws left  
over. Using an incorrect screw may damage the thread or screw head and result in  
the FRU not being securely fastened in place.  
After installing FRUs, check that the computer operates correctly.  
Tools and Equipment  
For your safety and the safety of the people around you, it is important that you use  
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) equipment. Correctly utilizing of the equipment increases the  
percentage of successful repairs and saves on the cost of damaged or destroyed parts. The  
following equipment is required for disassembly and assembly.  
One Philips screwdriver with type 0 bit (for THIN HEAD screws)  
One Philips screwdriver with type 1 bit (for screws other than above)  
Tweezers (for lifting screws)  
ESD mats (lay on work table or floor)  
An ESD wrist strap and heel grounder  
Anti-static carpet or flooring  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
Screw Tightening Torque  
Use the following torque when tightening screws.  
CAUTION: Overtightening may damage screws or parts. Undertightening may allow  
screws to loosen (and possibly fall out) causing a short circuit or other  
damage.  
NOTE: To tighten screws quickly and accurately, an electric screwdriver is  
recommended.  
M2 (2mm)  
0.167 N·m (1.7 kgf·cm)  
M2.5 (2.5mm)  
M2.5 (2.5mm)  
M3.0 (3mm)  
0.245 N·m(2.5 kgf·cm)  
0.392 N·m(4.0 kgf·cm) for Hinge support  
0.245 Nm (2.5 kgfcm)  
NOTE: To prevent damage to THIN HEAD screws, press along the axis of the  
screwdriver while turning the screw. This is because the contact area between the  
screw and driver is less than for a pan head screw (standard pan-shaped screw  
head).  
Grip Color  
Some screws have a colored grip area to help you determine the length of the screw.  
Even numbered length screws: Brown  
Odd numbered length screws: White  
Special length screw: Blue  
G rip a re a  
“Special length screw” means screws whose length is indicated in an integral number to the  
first decimal places such as 2.5 mm, 2.8 mm and so on.  
4-6  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
Screw Notation  
To make maintenance of the computer easier, markings of the kinds of the screws including  
the types and lengths of the screws are indicated on the computer body.  
Format:  
Screw shape + Screw length (mm)  
Screw shape  
B: Bind screw  
F: Thin head screw  
S: Super thin head screw  
T: Tapping screw  
U: Other screws (Unique screws: pan head, stud, etc.)  
Example: B6 … 6mm bind screw  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
4.2 Battery pack  
Removing the battery pack  
The following describes the procedure for removing the battery pack (See Figure 4-1).  
CAUTION: Take care not to short circuit the terminals when removing the battery pack.  
Similarly, do not drop, knock, scratch, disassemble, twist, or bend the battery  
pack.  
1. Turn off the power of the computer.  
2. Disconnect the AC adapter and all external devices from the computer.  
3. Turn the computer upside down.  
4. Slide and hold the battery release latch (1) to free the battery pack after moving the  
battery release lock (2) into it unlock position – pick the battery pack out of the  
computer from fillister.  
Fillister  
Latch 1  
Latch 2  
Figure 4-1 Removing the battery pack  
4-8  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
NOTE: Dispose of the used battery pack in accordance with the laws and ordinances of  
your local authority.  
Installing the battery pack  
The following describes the procedure for installing the battery pack (See Figure 4-1).  
CAUTION: There is a danger that the lithium ion battery pack may explode if not fitted,  
operated, handled, or disposed correctly. Dispose always the used battery  
pack in accordance with the laws and ordinances of your local authority. Use  
only the batteries approved by Toshiba.  
NOTE: Check visually the battery terminals and clean off any dirt with a dry cloth.  
1. Turn off the power of the computer.  
2. Disconnect the AC adapter and all external devices from the computer.  
3. Attach the battery cover to the battery pack.  
4. Insert the battery pack  
5. Ensure the battery release lock (1) is moved into its locked position  
Lock1  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
4.3 PC card  
Removing a PC card  
The following describes the procedure for removing a PC card (See Figure 4-2-1).  
CAUTION: Insert or remove a PC card in accordance with any instructions in a PC card  
manual or the manuals of the computer system you are using.  
1. Push the eject button 1. It will pop out PCMCIA Card when you release it. And eject  
button 2 for NEW Card Then press the eject button once more to eject a PC card.  
2. Grasp one of PC card and remove it.  
NOTE: If a PC card is not inserted all the way, the eject button may not pop out. Be sure  
to push a PC card firmly and press the eject button again.  
Eject Button1  
Eject Button2  
Figure 4-2-1 Removing a PC card  
4-10  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
Installing a PC card  
The following describes the procedure for inserting a PC card (See Figure 4-2-2).  
1. Make sure the eject button does not stick out.  
2. Insert a PC card and press it until it is securely connected.  
Figure 4-2-2 Insert a PC card  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
4.4 HDD  
Removing a HDD  
The following describes the procedure for removing a HDD (See Figure 4-3 to 4-4).  
CAUTION: Take care not to press on the top or bottom of a HDD. Pressure may cause  
data loss or damage to the device.  
1. Turn the computer upside down.  
2. Remove the following screws securing a HDD slot cover and remove a HDD slot  
cover.  
M2.5×4.0B  
FLAT BIND screw  
x4  
3. Remove the following screws securing the HDD assembly.  
M2.5×4.0B  
FLAT BIND screw  
x2  
4. Disconnect the HDD assembly from the connector on the system board CN19.  
4-12  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
CAUTION: When a HDD is installed, they are installed in the position as the following  
figure.  
HDD Door  
M2.5x4.0B FLAT BIND  
M3.0x3.5B FLAT BIND  
HDD  
module  
CN 19  
Figure 4-3 Removing the HDD assembly  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
5. Remove the following screws securing the HDD holder and remove the HDD holder.  
M3.0×3.5B  
FLAT BIND screw  
x4  
HDD  
HDD holder  
M3.0x3.5 FLAT BIND  
Figure 4-4 Removing a HDD  
4-14  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
Installing a HDD  
The following describes the procedure for installing a HDD (See Figure 4-3 to 4-4).  
1. Install a HDD to the HDD holder and secure it with the following screws.  
M3.0×3.5F  
FLAT BIND screw  
x4  
NOTE: Although they are 3mm head screws, screw torque must be set in 2.5kg-cm for  
four screws securing the HDD holder.  
2. Insert the HDD assembly into the HDD slot and connect it carefully to the CN19 on  
the system board.  
3. Secure the HDD assembly with the following screw.  
M2.5×4.0B  
FLAT BIND screw  
x2  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
4.5  
Wireless LAN card  
Removing a Wireless LAN card  
The following describes the procedure for removing a Wireless LAN card (See Figure 4-5).  
1. Remove the following screw of wireless cover securing wireless LAN card cover and  
remove it. And remove screw of wireless board  
2.5.0 x 4.0B  
BIND screw  
x2  
2. Disconnect the wireless LAN antenna cable from the connectors on a wireless LAN  
card.  
3. Open the left and right latches holding a wireless LAN card and remove a wireless  
LAN card from the connector CN30 on the system board.  
Wireless LAN card cover with  
2 screws  
Wireless LAN with 2 screws  
Wireless LAN antenna  
cable  
CN30  
Wireless LAN card  
Figure 4-5 Removing a wireless LAN card  
4-16  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
Installing a Wireless LAN card  
The following describes the procedure for installing a Wireless LAN card (See Figure 4-5).  
1. Insert a wireless LAN card terminals slantwise into the connector CN30 on the  
computer and press a wireless LAN card and lock the secure screws.  
2. Connect the wireless LAN antenna cables to the terminals on a wireless LAN card.  
3. Install the wireless LAN card cover and secure it with the following screw.  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
4.6 Memory module  
CAUTION: The power of the computer must be turned off when you remove a memory  
module. Removing a memory module with the power on risks damaging the  
module or the computer itself.  
Do not touch memory module terminals. Any dirt on the terminals may  
cause memory access problems.  
Never press hard or bend a memory module.  
Removing a memory module  
To remove a memory module, confirm that the computer is in boot mode. Then perform the  
following procedure (See Figure 4-6).  
1. Loose the screw securing the memory slot cover.  
2. Remove the memory slot cover.  
3. Open the left and right latches and remove a memory module.  
4-18  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
Memory  
Module Cover  
Figure 4-6 Removing a memory module  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
Installing a memory module  
To install a memory module, confirm that the computer is in boot mode. Then perform the  
following procedure (See Figure 4-7).  
1. Insert a memory module into the connector of the computer slantwise (terminal side  
first) and press it to connect firmly.  
CAUTION: The power must be turned off when you insert a memory module. Inserting a  
memory module with the power on might damage the module or the  
computer itself.  
Never press hard or bend a memory module.  
2. Install the memory slot cover and secure it with the screw.  
3. When the power of the computer is turned on, the computer checks automatically the  
memory size. Confirm that the new memory is detected correctly.  
4. If the memory is not detected, check that it is connected correctly.  
Socket1  
Socket2  
Figure 4-7 Insert a memory module  
4-20  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
4.7 Keyboard  
Removing the keyboard  
The following describes the procedure for removing the keyboard (See Figure 4-8 to 4-9).  
CAUTION: As the keycap may fall out, when handling the keyboard always hold it by  
the frame and do not touch the keycap.  
1. Turn the computer upside down  
2. Open the display.  
3. Remove KBD cover. Insert your finger into the slot between the keyboard cover and  
the keyboard. Then, lift up the keyboard cover to remove it. Remove six screws  
2.5x3.0 securing the keyboard.  
4. Insert your finger into the keyboard slot and keyboard. Then lift up the keyboard to  
remove it.  
5. Disconnect keyboard cable.  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
KBD cover  
Figure 4-8 Removing screws for KBD cover/keyboard  
Screw 2.5x3.0  
Keyboard  
Figure 4-9 Removing the keyboard/KBD cover  
4-22  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
Installing the keyboard  
The following describes the procedure for installing the keyboard (See Figure 4-8 to 4-9).  
1. Turn the keyboard upside down and place it on the palm rest as its face down.  
Connect the keyboard flexible cable to the connector CN3200 on the system board.  
2. Slide and set the speaker cover assembly and secure it with the following screw.  
M2.5×3.0B FLAT BIND screw  
x6  
3. Install the keyboard brace by pressing it from the topside.  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
4.8 Function Button Board  
Removing the Function Board  
The following describes the procedure for removing the Function board (See Figure 4-10).  
1. Remove the following screw securing the switch membrane.  
M2.5×3.0B FLAT BIND screw  
x3  
2. Unlock the Function board cable and Push up the Function board to the arrow  
direction and remove it.  
M2.5x3.0 FLAT BIND  
Function Board  
Figure 4-10 Removing the Function board  
4-24  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
Installing the Function Board  
The following describes the procedure for installing the switch membrane.  
1. Press Function board in the computer.  
2. Secure the Function board with the following screw.  
M2.5×3.0B FLAT BIND screw  
x3  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
4-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
4.9  
Optical disk drive  
NOTE: Do not apply excessive force to the top of an optical disk drive.  
Do not touch the shaded portion of the figure below, when the drive is removed  
or installed.  
Removing an optical disk drive  
The following describes the procedure for removing an optical disk drive (See Figure 4-  
11and 4-12).  
1. Remove Keyboard and next remove the following screws securing an optical disk  
drive.  
M2.0×6.0B FLAT BIND screw  
x1  
2. Disconnect an optical disk drive toward the arrow direction from the connector CN26  
on the system board.  
Optical disk drive  
M2.5 x 6.0B FLAT BIND  
Push Out  
Figure 4-11 Removing an optical disk drive  
4-26  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
ODD bracket  
M2.0×3.0  
Figure 4-12 Disassembling the side bracket  
Installing an optical disk drive  
The following describes the procedure for installing an optical disk drive (See Figure 4-11  
and 4-12).  
1. Attach the ODD bracket to an optical disk drive and secure it with the following  
screws.  
M2.0×3.0 Flat BIND screw  
x2  
2. Insert an optical disk drive assembly into the slot and connect it to the connector  
CN26 on the system board.  
3. Secure the ODD drive with the following screw.  
M2.5X6.0  
Flat BIND screw X1  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
4-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
4
4.10 Display assembly  
Removing the display assembly  
The following describes the procedure for removing the display assembly (See Figure 4-13 to  
4-17).  
1. Close the display and turn the computer upside down.  
2. Open the MINIPCI Door and remove the wireless LAN screws and antenna  
connector.  
M2.5x4.0 FLAT BIND  
(Locktight)  
Figure 4-13 Removing the screws (securing display assembly)  
4-28  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
3. Open the display and removing the k/b cover and keyboard.  
Figure 4-14 Removing keyboard cover  
4. Disassembly Function board and pull out the wireless LAN antenna and LCD cables  
from the guide, If there was Bluetooth Antenna, pls. also remove it ( the 5th point)  
1
4
2
3
5
Figure 4-25 Removing the Wireless Antenna and Bluetooth  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
4-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
4. Opening the display to 180 degree, and remove the hinge screw .  
M2.5×6.0 FLAT BIND screw  
x4 (Locktight)  
M2.5x6.0 FLAT BIND  
(Locktight)  
M2.5x6.0 FLAT BIND  
(Locktight)  
.
.
Figure 4-36 Removing the hinge screw  
4-30  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
5. Remove the LCD harness from the connector on the system board and pulling out the  
pole of hinge from the hole of hinge assembly, remove the display assembly from the  
base assembly.  
.
Display assembly  
Base assembly  
Figure 4-17 Removing the LCD harness and remove display assembly  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
4-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
Installing the display assembly  
The following describes the procedure for installing the display assembly (See Figure 4-13 to  
4-17).  
1. Inserting the pole of hinge to the hole of hinge assembly, set the display assembly on  
the base assembly.  
2. Secure the hinges with the following screws , Secure the display mask with the  
following screws and stick the mask seal on them.  
M2.5×6.0B FLAT BIND screw  
x4  
(Locktight)  
NOTE: Be sure to apply the locktight to the screws instructed in the figure above.  
3. Connect the LCD harness to the connector on the system board.  
4. Arrange the wireless antenna cables along the guide (front) and secure them with  
guide.  
5. Pass the cables to the back of computer through the slot.  
6. Install the keyboard and k/b cover of the system.  
7. Arrange the wireless LAN antenna and Bluetooth cables along the guide and contact  
with the connector.  
8. Secure the display assembly from the back of computer with the following screws.  
M2.5×6.0B FLAT BIND screw  
x4  
(Locktight)  
4-32  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
4.11 Bluetooth  
The following describes for installing the display assembly (See Figure 4-18).  
Removing the Bluetooth  
1. Pull out the Bluetooth cable connect from Bluetooth board  
2. Loose the below screw and pull out the MB->BT cable.  
z M2.3x3.0  
x2  
Bluetooth  
Antenna  
M2.0*3.0  
Figure 4-18 Removing the Bluetooth  
Installing the Bluetooth  
1. Fix the below screw  
z
M2.3x3.0  
x2  
2. Connect Bluetooth cable with MB and press Bluetooth antenna tight with Bluetooth  
connect  
NOTE: Be sure to apply the locktight to the screws instructed in the figure above.  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
4-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
4.12 Cover assembly  
Removing the cover assembly  
The following describes the procedure for removing the cover assembly (See Figure 4-19 to  
4-21).  
1. Turn over the computer.  
2. Remove the following screws securing the cover assembly from the back and bottom  
of computer.  
M2.5×6.0  
M2.5×6.0B FLAT BIND screw Back  
M2.5x4.0 FLAT BIND screw  
FLAT BIND screw Front  
x3  
x18  
x1  
Front 2.5*6 x3  
Touchpad FFC  
Fingerprint  
Top LENS  
Figure 4-19 Removing the screws cable from connect (front)  
4-34  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
Screws 2.5*6  
Screws 2.5*4  
Screws 2.5*6  
Figure 4-40 Removing the screws (back)  
3. Disconnect the touch pad flat cable/Fingerprint cable/Top LENS from the connector  
on the system board.  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
4-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
4. Pull up and remove the cover assembly from the base assembly.  
Cover assembly  
Cable drain  
Base assembly  
Figure 4-21 Removing the cover assembly  
4-36  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
Installing the cover assembly  
The following describes the procedure for installing the cover assembly (See Figure 4-19 to  
4-21).  
1. Install the cover assembly to the base assembly.  
NOTE: Be careful not to catch the cables between cover assembly and base assembly.  
2. Connect the touch pad flat cable to the connector on the system board.  
3. Secure the cover assembly with the following screws from the back and bottom of  
computer.  
M2.5×6.0B FLAT BIND screw Front  
M2.5×6.0B FLAT BIND screw Back  
M2.5x4.0 B FLAT BIND screw  
x3  
x18  
x1  
4. Free the cable from cable-drain when through the antenna cable to PCB hole.  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
4-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
4.13 Touch pad  
Removing the touch pad  
The following describes the procedure for removing the touch pad (See Figure 4-22).  
1. Peel off the glass tape and disconnect the touch pad flat cable from the connector on  
the touch pad and peel the al foil.  
2. Remove the following screws securing the touch pad plate.  
M2.5×3.0B SUPER THIN HEAD screw  
3. Turning up the insulator, remove the touch pad plate.  
4. Peel off and remove the touch pad from the cover assembly.  
x7  
Touch pad  
Touch pad plate  
M2.5x3.0B  
M2.5x3.0B  
Touch pad board  
M2.5x3.0B  
Touch pad flat cable  
Figure 4-22 Removing the touch pad  
4-38  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
Installing the touch pad  
The following describes the procedure for installing the touch pad (See Figure 4-22).  
1. Peel off the separator covering on the sensor portion of a new touch pad.  
NOTE: Do not reuse the touch pad so that it can not be used after peeling off from the  
computer. Be sure to stick a new touch pad.  
When stickimg the touch pad, be careful not to get the bubbles under the touch  
pad.  
2. Stick and install the touch pad on the cover assembly.  
3. Install the touch pad plate and secure it with the following screws.  
M2.5×3.0B SUPER THIN HEAD screw  
4. Stick the insulator on the touch pad plate.  
x7  
5. Connect the touch pad flat cable to the connector on the touch pad and stick the glass  
tape on the connector.  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
4-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
4.14 Audio Board  
The following describes for removing the cover assembly (See Figure 4-23).  
Removing the audio board  
1. Pull out the audio board cable from audio board connect CN4  
2. Loose the below screws and then incline pull out audio board.  
z M2.5x4.0  
FLAT BIND screw  
x1  
1
2
Figure 4-23 Removing the Audio Board  
Installing the audio board  
1. Insert the audio board into base case and connect audio board cable with CN4  
2. Fix the below screws  
M2.5x4.0  
FLAT BIND screw  
x1  
NOTE: Be careful not to catch the cables between cover assembly and base assembly.  
4-40  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
4.15 Fingerprint  
The following describes for removing the cover assembly (See Figure 4-24).  
Remove the Fingerprint  
1. Pull out the fingerprint cable from connect CN5  
2. Loose below screws from fingerprint board and take it out top case  
z M2.5x4.0  
FLAT BIND screw  
x2  
M2.5x4.0  
Figure 4-24 Removing the Fingerprint  
Installing the Fingerprint  
1. Turn over top case and put fingerprint in correct location  
2. Fix below screws and connect the fingerprint cable CN5  
z M2.5x4.0  
FLAT BIND screw  
x2  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
4-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
4.16 USB Board  
The following describes for removing the cover assembly (See Figure 4-25).  
Removing USB board  
1. Remove the USB cable from CN4 and USBCN1  
2. Loose below screw from USB board  
z M2.5x4.0  
FLAT BIND screw  
x1  
Figure 4-25 Removing the USB board  
Installing the USB Board  
1. Put USB board in correct location and fix below screw  
z M2.5x4.0  
FLAT BIND screw  
x1  
2. Connect the USB cable between CN4 and USBCN1  
4-42  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
4-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
4
4-44  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
4.17 System board  
CAUTION: 1. When handling the system board, always hold by the edges. Do not touch  
the printed circuit face.  
2. If replacing with a new system board, execute the subtest01 Initial  
configuration in section 3.3 “Setting of the hardware configuration”. Also  
update with the latest BIOS as described in Appendix G “BIOS Rewrite  
Procedures” and with the latest EC/KBC as described in Appendix H  
“EC/KBC Rewrite Procedures”.  
Removing the system board  
The following describes the procedure for removing the system board (See Figure 4-26).  
1. Disconnect the speaker cable from the connector CN10 on the system board.  
2. Remove the following screws securing the system board and remove the system  
board.  
M2.5×4.0 BIND screw  
x3  
M2.5x4.0 BIND SCREW  
CN10  
Speaker cable  
Audio board cable  
Figure 4-26 Removing the system board  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
4-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
Installing the system board  
The following describes the procedure for installing the system board (See Figure 4-26).  
1. Secure the system board with the following screws.  
M2.5×4.0 BIND screw  
x3  
2. Connect the speaker cable to the connector CN 10 on the system board.  
4-46  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
4.18 CPU  
Removing the CPU heat sink  
The following describes the procedure for removing the CPU heat sink (See Figure 4-27 ).  
1. Disconnect the Heat sink cable from the connector CN20 on the system board  
2. Remove the following screws securing the heat sink holder along 1 to 3.  
M2.5×4.0  
BIND screw  
x3  
NOTE: When removing the heat sink holder, be sure to remove the screws in the reverse  
order of the number marked on the holder.  
3. Remove the CPU heat sink.  
4
1
3
5
2
M2.5 x 4.0 BIND  
CPU heat sink  
CN20  
Figure 4-27 Removing the CPU heat sink  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
4-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
4. Unlock the CPU by rotating the cam on the CPU socket 120 degrees to the  
counterclockwise with a flat-blade screwdriver.  
5. Remove the CPU.  
Figure 4-28 Removing the CPU  
Installing the CPU  
The following describes the procedure for installing the CPU (See Figure 4-27 to 4-29).  
1. Check that the mark of cam is in the unlocking position.  
2. Attach the CPU to the correct position in the CPU socket.  
3. Fix the CPU by rotating the cam 120 degrees to the clockwise with a flat-blade  
screwdriver.  
4. If there is already silicon grease on the CPU, clean it with a cloth.  
Using a special applicator, apply silicon grease so that the CPU chip on the CPU is  
completely covered.  
4-48  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
NOTE: Apply the silicon grease enough to cover the chip surface using the special  
applicator.  
Figure 4-29 Applying silicon grease  
5. Install the CPU heat sink and heat sink holder and secure them with the following  
screws along 1 to 5.  
M2.5×4.0BIND screw  
x5  
6. Connect the Heat sink cable to the connector CN 20on the system board  
NOTE: When securing the heat sink holder, be sure to secure the screws in the order of  
the number marked on the holder.  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
4-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
4.19 VGA heat sink  
Removing the VGA heat sink  
The following describes the procedure for removing the VGA heat sink (See Figure 4-30).  
1. Remove the following screws securing the VGA heat sink along 1 to 5.  
M2.5×3.0 BIND screw  
x5  
2. Pull up the VGA heat sink straight and remove it.  
1
5
3
4
2
Figure 4-30 Removing the VGA heat sink  
4-50  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
Installing the VGA heat sink  
The following describes the procedure for installing the VGA heat sink (See Figure 4-30).  
1. Install the VGA heat sink.  
NOTE: For details on applying the silicon grease, refer to Installing the CPU.  
2. Secure the VGA heat sink with the following screws along 1 to 5.  
M2.5×3.0 BIND screw  
x5  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
4-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
4.20 LCD unit / FL inverter  
CAUTION: When replacing a LCD, it is required that SVP parameter is set. Update with  
the latest EC/KBC as described in Appendix H “EC/KBC Rewrite  
Procedures”.  
Removing the LCD unit / FL inverter  
The following describes the procedure for removing the LCD unit and FL inverter (See  
Figure 4-31 to 4-34).  
1. Remove Screw rubber cover X4  
2. Remove the following screws securing the display mask  
M2.5×4.0  
BIND screw X4  
3. Insert your finger between the edge of the display mask and the LCD, and remove the  
display mask while releasing the latches of display mask.  
M2.5x4.0  
M 2.5X6.0 BIND screw  
Figure 4-31 Removing the display mask  
4-52  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
4. Pull out one insulator and peel off the other one adhered to the FL inverter.  
5. Disconnect the LCD harnesses from the connectors CN1 on the FL inverter.  
6. Disconnect the HV harnesses from the connectors CN2 on the FL inverter.  
7. Remove the FL inverter while peeling off the double-sided tape.  
CN1  
Insulator  
CN2  
LCD harness  
FL inverter  
Double-sided tape  
HV harness  
Insulator (adhered)  
Figure 4-32 Removing the FL inverter  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
4-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
8. Remove the following screws securing the LCD unit.  
M2.5x4.0 BINK HEAD screw  
x6  
9. With the bottom edge of the LCD unit on the display cover, lift only the top edge of  
the LCD unit. After peeling off the CONDUTIVE tape, disconnect the LCD harness  
from the connector on the back of the LCD.  
10. Remove the LCD unit.  
M2.5x4.0 BINK HEAD  
LCD unit  
CONDUTIVE tape  
M2.5X4.0 BINK HEAD  
LCD harness  
Figure 4-33 Removing the LCD unit  
4-54  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
11. Remove the following screws securing the LCD support (LCD unit side) and remove  
the LCD supports from the LCD unit.  
M2.0x3.0 BINK screw  
x4  
LCD cable  
LCD logo  
Inverter  
M2.0x3.0  
BINK  
Bluetooth  
Antenna  
Latch  
LCD  
Wireless  
Antenna  
LCD support  
LCD support  
M2.0x3.0  
BINK  
Figure 4-34 Removing the LCD supports  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
4-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacement Procedures  
Installing the LCD unit/FL Inverter  
The following describes the procedure for installing the LCD unit and FL inverter (See  
Figure 4-31 to 4-34).  
1. Install the LCD supports (LCD unit side) to the LCD and secure them with the  
following screws.  
M2.0×3.0 BINK screw  
x4  
2. Stand the LCD unit on the display cover and connect the LCD harness to the  
connector on the back of LCD.  
3. Stick the conductive tape on the connector of LCD harness.  
4. Secure the LCD unit with the following screws.  
M2.5×4.0 BINK screw  
x6  
5. Connect LCD harnesses to the connector CN1 of the FL inverter.  
CAUTION: Be careful not to connect the LCD harnesses to the wrong connectors of FL  
inverter.  
6. Connect HV harnesses to the connector CN2 of the FL inverter.  
7. Install the display mask while fitting the latches.  
8. Secure the display mask with following screws  
M2.5×6.0  
BIND screw X4  
9. Cover screws with Screw rubber cover X4  
NOTE: When installing the display mask, make sure there is no gap between the display  
mask and the display cover.  
4-56  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
App-i  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
App-ii  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix Contents  
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module ..........................................................................A-1  
Appendix B Board Layout...............................................................................................B-1  
B.1  
B.2  
B.3  
B.4  
B.5  
B.6  
B.7  
B.8  
System Board................................................................................................ B-1  
Function Button Board Back View............................................................... B-4  
Modem Board ............................................................................................... B-5  
Touch Pad Board........................................................................................... B-6  
Audio Board.................................................................................................. B-7  
VGA Board ................................................................................................... B-9  
Fingerprint Board........................................................................................ B-11  
USB Board.................................................................................................. B-12  
Appendix C Pin Assignment............................................................................................C-1  
C.1  
C.2  
C.3  
C.4  
C.5  
C.6  
C.7  
C.8  
C.9  
CN1 Bluetooth Connector................................................................................. 1  
CN2 LCD Panel Connector ............................................................................. 1  
CN3 Button Board Connector.......................................................................... 2  
CN4 USB Board Connector............................................................................. 3  
CN5 Finger Print Board Connector ................................................................. 4  
CN6 Internal K/B Connector ........................................................................... 4  
CN7 Touchpad Board Connector..................................................................... 5  
CN8 RTC Battery Connector........................................................................... 5  
CN9 PCMCIA Connector................................................................................ 5  
C.10 CN10 Speaker Connector ................................................................................ 7  
C.11 CN11 S-Video Connector................................................................................. 7  
C.12 CN12 CRT Connector...................................................................................... 8  
C.13 CN13 DVI Connector ...................................................................................... 8  
C.14 CN14 RJ11/RJ45 Connector............................................................................ 9  
QOSMIO G10 Maintenance Manual (960-497)  
App-iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C.15 CN15 USB Port-1 .......................................................................................... 10  
C.16 CN16 USB Port-2 .......................................................................................... 10  
C.17 CN17/ CN20 Fan Connector.......................................................................... 10  
C.18 CN18 RJ11 Exchange Connector .................................................................. 10  
C.19 CN19 HDD connector.................................................................................... 10  
C.21 CN21 Power Jack Connector......................................................................... 12  
C.22 CN22 VGA Power Connector ....................................................................... 12  
C.23 CN23 DDR2 Connector................................................................................. 12  
C.24 CN24 DDR2 connector.................................................................................. 17  
C.25 CN25 1394 connector .................................................................................... 21  
C.26 CN26 ODD Board connector......................................................................... 22  
C.27 CN27 VGA Interface connector .................................................................... 23  
C.28 CN 28 Modem Board connector.................................................................... 27  
C.29 CN 29 New Card connector........................................................................... 28  
C.30 CN 30 Mini Card connector........................................................................... 28  
C.31 CN 31 5 in 1 Card connector ......................................................................... 30  
C.32 CN 32 Audio Board connector ...................................................................... 31  
C.33 CN 33 Speaker LED connector...................................................................... 31  
C.31 PJ1 Battery connector ..................................................................................... 32  
Appendix D Display Codes..............................................................................................D-1  
D.1  
Display Codes............................................................................................... D-1  
Appendix E Key Layout.................................................................................................. E-1  
E.1  
E.2  
E 3  
E 4  
E 5  
E 6  
E 7  
E 8  
United States (US) Keyboard.........................................................................E-1  
United Kingdom (UK) Keyboard .................................................................E-1  
Arabia (AR) Keyboard .................................................................................E-2  
Belgium (BB) Keyboard...............................................................................E-2  
Czech (CZ) Keyboard....................................................................................E-3  
German (GR) Keyboard ...............................................................................E-3  
Danish (DK) Keyboard..................................................................................E-4  
Spanish (SP) Keyboard..................................................................................E-4  
App-iv  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E 9  
French (FR) Keyboard.................................................................................E-5  
E 10 Hungary(HU) Keyboard................................................................................E-5  
E 11 Italian (IT) Keyboard.....................................................................................E-6  
E 12 Korean (KR) Keyboard .................................................................................E-6  
E 13 Norwegian (NO) Keyboard...........................................................................E-7  
E 14 Portuguese (PT) Keyboard ..........................................................................E-7  
E 15 Traditional Chinese (TC) Keyboard..............................................................E-8  
E 16 Swedish (SW) Keyboard .............................................................................E-8  
E 17 Russian (RU) Keyboard ................................................................................E-9  
E 18 Turkish (TR) Keyboard................................................................................E-9  
E 19 Japanese (JP) Keyboard..............................................................................E-10  
E 20 Swiss-German(SL) Keyboard ......................................................................E-10  
E 21 Hebrew Keyboard.........................................................................................E-11  
E 22 Greek Keyboard............................................................................................E-11  
QOSMIO G10 Maintenance Manual (960-497)  
App-v  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F Wiring Diagrams ......................................................................................... F-1  
F.1  
F.2  
RGB Monitor ID Wraparound Connector ....................................................F-1  
LAN Loopbak Connector ..............................................................................F-1  
Appendix G BIOS Rewrite Procedures............................................................................G-1  
Appendix H EC/KBC Rewrite Procedures.......................................................................H-1  
Appendix I Reliability..................................................................................................... I-1  
App-vi  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A  
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module  
Precautions for handling the LCD module  
The LCD module can be easily damaged during assembly or disassembly. Observe the  
following precautions when handling the LCD module:  
1. When installing the LCD module in the LCD cover, be sure to seat it so that it is  
properly aligned and maximum visibility of the display is maintained.  
2. Be careful to align the holes at the four corners of the LCD module with the  
corresponding holes in the LCD cover before securing the module with screws.  
Do not force the module into place, because stress can affect its performance.  
Also, the panel’s polarized surface is easily scarred, so be careful when handling it.  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
A-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Handling the LCD Module  
3. If the panel’s surface gets dirty, wipe it with cotton or a soft cloth. If it is still dirty,  
try breathing on the surface to create a light condensate and wipe it again.  
If the surface is very dirty, we recommend a CRT cleaning agent. Apply the agent to  
a cloth and then wipe the panel’s surface. Do not apply cleanser directly to the panel.  
4. If water or other liquid is left on the panel’s surface for a long period, it can change  
the screen’s tint or stain it. Be sure to quickly wipe off any liquid.  
A-2  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Handling the LCD Module  
5. Glass is used in the panel, so be careful not to drop it or let it strike a hard object,  
which could cause breakage or cracks.  
6. CMOS-LSI circuits are used in the module, so guard against damage from  
electrostatic discharge. Be sure to wear a wrist or ankle ground when handling the  
module.  
Satellite L20 Maintenance Manual (960-Q01)  
A-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Handling the LCD Module  
7. Do not expose the module to direct sunlight or strong ultraviolet rays for long periods.  
8. Do not store the module at temperatures below specifications. Cold can cause the  
liquid crystals to freeze, lose their elasticity or otherwise suffer damage.  
9. Do not disassemble the LCD module. Disassembly can cause malfunctions.  
A-4  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Handling the LCD Module  
10. If you transport the module, do not use packing material that contains epoxy resin  
(amine) or silicon glue (alcohol or oxide). These materials can release gas that can  
damage the panel’s polarization.  
Satellite L20 Maintenance Manual (960-Q01)  
A-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Handling the LCD Module  
A-6  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B  
Appendix B Board Layout  
B.1  
System Board  
Figure B-1 System board layout (front)  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual (960-Q02)  
B-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Board Layout  
Figure B-2 System board layout (Back)  
B-2  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Board Layout  
Table B-1-1 System board ICs and connectors  
Satellite L20 Maintenance Manual(960-Q01)  
B-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Board Layout  
B.2  
Function Button board  
<Front layout>  
<Back layout>  
Figure B-3 Function Button board layout  
Table B-2 Function Button board connectors  
B-4  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Board Layout  
B.3  
Modem board  
<Front layout>  
<Back layout>  
Figure B-3 Modem board layout  
Table B-3 Modem board connectors  
Satellite L20 Maintenance Manual(960-Q01)  
B-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Board Layout  
B.4  
Touch Pad Board  
<Front layout>  
<Back layout>  
Figure B-4 Touch pad board layout  
Table B-4 Touch pad board connectors  
B-6  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Board Layout  
B.5  
Audio Board  
<Front layout>  
<Back layout>  
Figure B-5 Audio board layout  
Satellite L20 Maintenance Manual(960-Q01)  
B-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Board Layout  
Table B-5 Audio board connectors  
B-8  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Board Layout  
B.6  
VGA Board  
<Front layout>  
Figure B-6-4 VGA board layout (front)  
Satellite L20 Maintenance Manual(960-Q01)  
B-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Board Layout  
<Back layout>  
Figure B-6-2 VGA board layout (back)  
Table B-6 VGA board connectors  
B-10  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Board Layout  
B.7  
Fingerprint Board  
<Front layout>  
<Back layout>  
Figure B-7 Fingerprint board layout  
Table B-7 Fingerprint board connectors  
Satellite L20 Maintenance Manual(960-Q01)  
B-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Board Layout  
B.8  
USB Board  
<Front layout>  
<Back layout>  
Figure B-8 USB board layout  
Table B-8 USB board connectors  
B-12  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Pin Assignment  
CN1 Bluetooth Connector  
CONN SMD FFC 20P 1R FR (P0.5, H2.0)  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
+3V  
I/O  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
NC  
I/O  
1
3
---  
---  
I/O  
---  
---  
---  
2
---  
I/O  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
WCS_DAT  
USBP+  
WCS_CLK  
NC  
4
USBP-  
NC  
5
6
7
8
NC  
9
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
GND  
NC  
11  
13  
15  
17  
19  
NC  
BT_RESET# I  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
---  
NC  
---  
---  
GND  
GND  
CN2 LCD Panel Connector  
CONN SMD HOUSING 40P 2R FS (P0.5, H2.6)  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
I/O  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
LVDS_TXUCK  
LVDS_TXU#0  
GND  
I/O  
1
3
5
LVDS_TXUCK# I  
2
4
6
I
GND  
---  
I
LVDS_TXU0  
I
---  
Satellite L10 Maintenance Manual(960-Q01)  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pin Assignment  
7
LVDS_TXL#2  
GND  
I
8
LVDS_TXL2  
LVDS_TXL#1  
GND  
I
9
---  
I
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
22  
24  
26  
28  
30  
32  
34  
36  
38  
40  
42  
44  
46  
I
11  
13  
15  
17  
19  
21  
23  
25  
27  
29  
31  
33  
35  
37  
39  
41  
43  
45  
LVDS_TXL1  
LVDS_TXL#0  
GND  
---  
I
I
LVDS_TXL0  
---  
I
LVDS_TXLCK# I  
LVDS_TXLCK  
PNL_CLK  
LVDS_TXU#2  
GND  
GND  
---  
I/O  
I
PNL_DAT  
LVDS_TXU2  
LVDS_TXU#1  
GND  
I/O  
I
---  
I
I
LVDS_TXU1  
INVCC0  
VADJ  
---  
---  
I
---  
I
INVCC0  
PNL_BLON  
NC  
NC  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
LCDVCC  
+5V  
LCDVCC  
+5V  
GND  
NC  
+3V  
+3V  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
NC  
NC  
CN3 Button Board Connector  
CONN SMD FFC 20P 1R FR (P0.5, H2.0)  
2
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pin Assignment  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
I/O  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
BT1#  
I/O  
1
3
5
7
9
NBSWON#  
BT2#  
O
O
O
O
I
2
4
6
8
O
O
O
I
BT3#  
BT4#  
BT_IE#  
CAPSLED  
SCRLED  
NC  
BT_WWW#  
NUMLED  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
I
11  
13  
15  
17  
19  
EMAIL_LED I  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
NC  
---  
NC  
NC  
---  
---  
--  
NC  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
CN4 USB Board Connector  
CONN SMD WAFER 12P 1R MR (P1.25, H1.85)  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
USBP+  
GND  
I/O  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
USBP- I/O  
I/O  
1
3
5
7
9
I/O  
---  
2
4
6
8
USBP+  
GND  
I/O  
---  
---  
---  
---  
USBP-  
I/O  
---  
GND  
GND  
USBPWR  
USBPWR  
---  
10  
12  
USBPWR  
USBPWR  
11  
---  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pin Assignment  
CN5 Finger Print Board Connector  
CONN SMD HOUSING 6P 1R FR (P1.25, H1.85) EP  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
+3VSUS  
BUSBP+  
GND  
I/O  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
+3VSUS  
BUSBP-  
GND  
I/O  
1
3
5
---  
2
4
6
---  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
---  
CN6 Internal K/B Connector  
CONN SMD FPC 26P 1R FR (P1.0, H2.2)  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
MY3  
I/O  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
MY4  
I/O  
1
3
5
7
9
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
2
4
6
8
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
MY2  
MY5  
MY6  
MY7  
MY8  
MY9  
MY10  
MY12  
MY14  
MY1  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
22  
24  
26  
MY11  
MY13  
MY15  
MY0  
11  
13  
15  
17  
19  
21  
23  
25  
MY16  
MX6  
MX7  
MX5  
MY17  
MX0  
MX4  
MX1  
MX2  
MX3  
4
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pin Assignment  
CN7 Touchpad Board Connector  
CONN SMD FFC 6P 1R FR (P1.0, H1.95)  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
+5V_TP  
TPDATA  
GND  
I/O  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
+5V_TP  
TPCLK  
GND  
I/O  
1
3
5
---  
2
4
6
---  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
---  
CN8 RTC Battery Connector  
CONN SMD HEADER 2P MS (P1.25)  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
RTC_N  
I/O  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
GND  
I/O  
1
---  
2
---  
CN9 PCMCIA Connector  
CONN SMD HD, 68P, 2R, MS (P0.635, H3.35)  
PIN No. Signal name I/O  
GND  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
I/O  
1
3
5
7
9
---  
2
4
6
8
A_CAD0  
A_CAD3  
A_CAD7  
A_CAD9  
A_CAD12  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
A_CAD1  
I/O  
I/O  
O
A_CAD5  
A_CC/BE0#  
A_CAD11  
I/O  
10  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pin Assignment  
11  
13  
15  
17  
19  
21  
23  
25  
27  
29  
31  
33  
35  
37  
39  
41  
43  
45  
47  
49  
51  
53  
55  
57  
A_CAD14  
A_CPAR  
I/O  
I/O  
I
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
22  
24  
26  
28  
30  
32  
34  
36  
38  
40  
42  
44  
46  
48  
50  
52  
54  
56  
58  
A_CC/BE1#  
A_CPERR#  
A_CINT#  
AVPP  
O
O
A_CGNT#  
A_VCC  
O
---  
I
---  
A_CCLK  
A_CC/BE2#  
A_CAD20  
A_CAD22  
A_CAD24  
A_CAD26  
A_CAD29  
A_CIRDY#  
A_CAD18  
A_CAD21  
A_CAD23  
A_CAD25  
A_CAD27  
A_RSVD_D2  
GND  
O
O
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
A_CCLKRUN# I  
GND  
---  
A_CCD1#  
A_CAD4  
I/O  
I/O  
A_CAD2  
A_CAD6  
A_CAD8  
A_CVS1#  
A_CAD15  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
O
A_RSVD_D14 I/O  
A_CAD10  
A_CAD13  
A_CAD16  
A_CBLOCK#  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I
I/O  
A_RSVD_A18 I/O  
A_CSTOP#  
A_VCC  
O
A_CDEVSEL# I  
---  
O
AVPP  
---  
A_CTRDY#  
A_CAD17  
A_CVS2#  
A_CFRAME#  
A_CAD19  
A_CRST#  
I
I/O  
O
I/O  
I
6
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pin Assignment  
59  
A_CSERR#  
A_CC/BE3#  
A_CSTSCHG  
A_CAD30  
I
60  
62  
64  
66  
68  
A_CREQ#  
A_CAUDIO  
A_CAD28  
A_CAD31  
GND  
I
61  
63  
65  
67  
O
I
I
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
A_CCD2#  
CN10 Speaker Connector  
CONN SMD HD 4P 1R MR (P1.25, H3.2)  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
INSPKR+  
INSPKL+  
AUDGND  
I/O  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
INSPKR-  
INSPKL-  
I/O  
1
3
5
O
2
4
6
O
O
O
---  
AUDGND  
---  
CN11 S-Video Connector  
CONN DIP MINI-DIN 4P FR (P1.0, H10.5)  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
GND  
I/O  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
GND  
I/O  
1
3
5
---  
I
2
4
6
---  
TV_LUMA  
GND  
TV_CHROMA I  
GND ---  
---  
CN12 CRT Connector  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pin Assignment  
CONN DIP D-SUB 15P 2R FR (P0.76) L-F  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
CRT_R  
CRT_B  
GND  
I/O  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
CRT_G  
NC  
I/O  
1
3
5
7
9
I
2
4
6
8
I
I
---  
---  
---  
---  
I
---  
---  
---  
GND  
GND  
GND  
+5V_CRT  
10  
12  
14  
16  
GND  
11  
13  
15  
17  
CRT_SENSE# O  
CRTDDAT  
CRTHSYNC  
CRTDCLK  
GND  
I
CRTVSYNC I  
I
GND  
---  
---  
CN13 DVI Connector  
CONN D-SUB DIP 30P 3R FR (P1.9, H10.04)  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
DVI_TX2-  
GND  
I/O  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
DVI_TX2+  
NC  
I/O  
1
3
5
7
9
I
2
4
6
8
I
---  
---  
---  
NC  
DVIDDCCLK I/O  
DVIDDCDAT I/O  
NC  
---  
I
DVI_TX1-  
GND  
I
10  
12  
14  
16  
DVI_TX1+  
NC  
11  
13  
15  
---  
---  
---  
---  
I
NC  
+5V_DVI  
DVI_DET  
GND  
O
8
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pin Assignment  
17  
DVI_TX0-  
GND  
I
18  
20  
22  
24  
26  
28  
DVI_TX0+  
NC  
I
19  
21  
23  
25  
27  
---  
---  
I
---  
---  
I
NC  
GND  
DVI_CLK+  
GND  
DVI_CLK-  
GND  
---  
---  
---  
---  
NC  
NC  
CN14 RJ11/RJ45 Connector  
CONN RJ11/RJ45 14P2R FR (L: G, R: Y, H10.1) LF  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
+3V_S5  
X-TX3N  
X-TX1N  
X-TX2P  
X-TX0N  
+3V_S5  
TIPL_R  
GND  
I/O  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
I/O  
1
3
5
7
9
---  
2
4
6
8
LANACT_LED# ---  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
X-TX3P  
X-TX2N  
X-TX1P  
X-TX0P  
LAN_LINK#  
RINGL_R  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
O
10  
12  
14  
16  
11  
13  
15  
---  
---  
---  
---  
CN15 USB Port-1  
CONN DIP USB HS 4P 1R MR (P2.5, H5.75)  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pin Assignment  
I/O  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
I/O  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
USBP-  
GND  
1
3
5
7
USBPOWER ---  
2
4
6
8
I/O  
USBP+  
GND  
I/O  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
GND  
GND  
GND  
CN16 USB Port-2  
CONN DIP (USB) 4P 1R MR (L=13.60, H5.70)  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
I/O  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
USBP-  
GND  
I/O  
1
3
5
7
USBPOWER ---  
2
4
6
8
I/O  
---  
---  
---  
USBP+  
GND  
I/O  
---  
---  
GND  
GND  
GND  
CN17/CN20 Fan Connector  
CONN SMD WAFER, 3P, 1R, MS (P1.25)  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
+5V_FAN  
FANSIG  
I/O  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
GND ---  
I/O  
1
3
---  
O
2
CN18 RJ11 Exchange  
10  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pin Assignment  
CONN SMD HEADER 2P 1R MR (P1.25, H1.95)  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
TIPL  
I/O  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
RINGL ---  
I/O  
1
---  
2
CN19 HDD Connector  
CONN DIP HS 22P 1R FR (P1.27, H13.99)  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
GND  
I/O  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
I/O  
1
3
5
7
9
---  
2
SATA_TXP0 I  
GND ---  
SATA_RXP0 O  
SATA_TXN0 I  
SATA_RXN0 O  
4
6
GND  
---  
8
+3V_HDD  
+3V_HDD  
GND  
---  
+3V_HDD  
GND  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
22  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
11  
13  
15  
17  
19  
21  
GND  
+5V_HDD  
+5V_HDD  
NC  
+5V_HDD  
GND  
GND  
NC  
NC  
NC  
CN21 Power Jack  
CONN DIP HOUSING 4P FR (P2.5, H4.9)  
PIN No. Signal name I/O  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
I/O  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pin Assignment  
1
3
GND  
VA  
---  
---  
2
4
GND  
VA  
---  
---  
CN22 VGA Power Connector  
CONN SMD HEADER 10P MS (P1.5, H5.0)  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
GND  
I/O  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
GND  
I/O  
1
3
5
7
9
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
2
4
6
8
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
GND  
GND  
GND  
VIN  
VIN  
VIN  
VIN  
10  
VIN  
CN23 DDR2 Connector  
IC SKT DDRII SO-DIMM (200P, H4.0, RVS) EP  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
I/O  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
GND  
I/O  
---  
1
3
5
7
9
SM_VREF_DIMM ---  
2
4
6
8
GND  
---  
SM_DQ4  
SM_DQ0  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
SM_DQ1  
SM_DQ5  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
10  
12  
14  
SM_DM0  
GND  
I
11  
13  
SM_DQS#0  
SM_DQS0  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
SM_DQ7  
I/O  
12  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pin Assignment  
15  
GND  
---  
16  
18  
20  
22  
24  
26  
28  
30  
32  
34  
36  
38  
40  
42  
44  
46  
48  
50  
52  
54  
56  
58  
60  
62  
SM_DQ6  
GND  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I
17  
19  
21  
23  
25  
27  
29  
31  
33  
35  
37  
39  
41  
43  
45  
47  
49  
51  
53  
55  
57  
59  
61  
SM_DQ2  
SM_DQ3  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
SM_DQ13  
SM_DQ14  
GND  
SM_DQ12  
SM_DQ8  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
SM_DM1  
GND  
---  
I
SM_DQS#1  
SM_DQS1  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
SM_CLK0  
SM_CLK#0  
GND  
I
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
SM_DQ9  
SM_DQ15  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
SM_DQ10  
SM_DQ11  
GND  
GND  
---  
GND  
SM_DQ21  
SM_DQ17  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
SM_DQ20  
SM_DQ16  
GND  
SM_DQS#2  
SM_DQS2  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
PM_EXTTS#0 O  
SM_DM2  
GND  
I
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
SM_DQ23  
SM_DQ19  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
SM_DQ18  
SM_DQ22  
GND  
SM_DQ24  
I/O  
SM_DQ29  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pin Assignment  
63  
SM_DQ25  
GND  
I/O  
---  
I
64  
SM_DQ28  
GND  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I
65  
66  
67  
SMA_DM3  
NC  
68  
SM_DQS#3  
SM_DQS3  
GND  
69  
---  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I
70  
71  
GND  
72  
73  
SM_DQ26  
SM_DQ27  
GND  
74  
SM_DQ30  
SM_DQ31  
GND  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
M_CKE0  
+1.8VSUS  
NC  
80  
M_CKE1  
+1.8VSUS  
NC  
81  
---  
---  
I
82  
---  
---  
---  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I
83  
84  
85  
SM_BS2  
+1.8VSUS  
SM_MA12  
SM_MA9  
SM_MA8  
+1.8VSUS  
SM_MA5  
SM_MA3  
SM_MA1  
+1.8VSUS  
SM_MA10  
SM_BS0  
SM_WE#  
86  
NC  
87  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
I
88  
+1.8VSUS  
SM_MA11  
SM_MA7  
SM_MA6  
+1.8VSUS  
SM_MA4  
SM_MA2  
SM_MA0  
+1.8VSUS  
SM_BS1  
SM_RAS#  
M_CS#0  
89  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
98  
99  
100  
102  
104  
106  
108  
110  
101  
103  
105  
107  
109  
I
I
I
14  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pin Assignment  
111  
+1.8VSUS  
SM_CAS#  
M_CS#1  
+1.8VSUS  
M_ODT1  
GND  
---  
I
112  
114  
116  
118  
120  
122  
124  
126  
128  
130  
132  
134  
136  
138  
140  
142  
144  
146  
148  
150  
152  
154  
156  
158  
+1.8VSUS  
M_ODT0  
SM_MA13  
+1.8VSUS  
NC  
---  
113  
115  
117  
119  
121  
123  
125  
127  
129  
131  
133  
135  
137  
139  
141  
143  
145  
147  
149  
151  
153  
155  
157  
I
I
I/O  
---  
---  
I
---  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I
GND  
---  
SM_DQ35  
SM_DQ37  
GND  
SM_DQ32  
SM_DQ36  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
SM_DQS#4  
SM_DQS4  
GND  
SM_DM4  
GND  
I
---  
SM_DQ33  
SM_DQ34  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
SM_DQ38  
SM_DQ39  
GND  
SM_DQ44  
SM_DQ45  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
SM_DQ40  
SM_DQ41  
GND  
SM_DQS#5  
SM_DQS5  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
SM_DM5  
GND  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
SM_DQ42  
SM_DQ46  
GND  
SM_DQ43  
SM_DQ47  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
SM_DQ48  
SM_DQ52  
I/O  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pin Assignment  
159  
161  
163  
165  
167  
169  
171  
173  
175  
177  
179  
181  
183  
185  
187  
189  
191  
193  
195  
197  
199  
SM_DQ49  
GND  
I/O  
---  
160  
162  
164  
166  
168  
170  
172  
174  
176  
178  
180  
182  
184  
186  
188  
190  
192  
194  
196  
198  
200  
SM_DQ53  
GND  
I/O  
---  
I
NC  
---  
SM_CLK1  
SM_CLK#1  
GND  
GND  
---  
I
SM_DQS#6  
SM_DQS6  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
---  
I
SM_DM6  
GND  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
---  
---  
SM_DQ50  
SM_DQ51  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
SM_DQ54  
SM_DQ55  
GND  
SM_DQ56  
SM_DQ60  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
SM_DQ61  
SM_DQ57  
GND  
SM_DM7  
GND  
I
SM_DQS#7  
SM_DQS7  
GND  
---  
SM_DQ62  
SM_DQ58  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
SM_DQ59  
SM_DQ63  
GND  
CGDAT_SMB  
CGCLK_SMB  
+3V  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
SA0  
SA1  
CN24 DDR2 Connector  
16  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pin Assignment  
IC SKT DDRII SO-DIMM (200P, H8.0MM, 1.8V)  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
I/O  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
GND  
I/O  
1
SM_VREF_DIMM ---  
2
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I
3
GND  
---  
4
SM_DQ4  
SM_DQ0  
GND  
5
SM_DQ1  
SM_DQ5  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
6
7
8
9
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
22  
24  
26  
28  
30  
32  
34  
36  
38  
40  
42  
44  
SM_DM0  
GND  
11  
13  
15  
17  
19  
21  
23  
25  
27  
29  
31  
33  
35  
37  
39  
41  
43  
SM_DQS#0  
SM_DQS0  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I
SM_DQ7  
SM_DQ6  
GND  
SM_DQ2  
SM_DQ3  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
SM_DQ13  
SM_DQ14  
GND  
SM_DQ12  
SM_DQ8  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
SM_DM1  
GND  
---  
I
SM_DQS#1  
SM_DQS1  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
SM_CLK0  
SM_CLK#0  
GND  
I
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
---  
I/O  
SM_DQ9  
SM_DQ15  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
SM_DQ10  
SM_DQ11  
GND  
GND  
---  
GND  
SM_DQ21  
I/O  
SM_DQ20  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pin Assignment  
45  
47  
49  
51  
53  
55  
57  
59  
61  
63  
65  
67  
69  
71  
73  
75  
77  
79  
81  
83  
85  
87  
89  
91  
SM_DQ17  
GND  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I
46  
48  
50  
52  
54  
56  
58  
60  
62  
64  
66  
68  
70  
72  
74  
76  
78  
80  
82  
84  
86  
88  
90  
92  
SM_DQ16  
GND  
I/O  
---  
SM_DQS#2  
SM_DQS2  
GND  
PM_EXTTS#0 O  
SM_DM2  
GND  
I
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I
SM_DQ23  
SM_DQ19  
GND  
SM_DQ18  
SM_DQ22  
GND  
SM_DQ24  
SM_DQ25  
GND  
SM_DQ29  
SM_DQ28  
GND  
SMA_DM3  
NC  
SM_DQS#3  
SM_DQS3  
GND  
---  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I
GND  
SM_DQ26  
SM_DQ27  
GND  
SM_DQ30  
SM_DQ31  
GND  
M_CKE0  
+1.8VSUS  
NC  
M_CKE1  
+1.8VSUS  
NC  
---  
---  
I
---  
---  
---  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
SM_BS2  
+1.8VSUS  
SM_MA12  
SM_MA9  
NC  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
+1.8VSUS  
SM_MA11  
SM_MA7  
18  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pin Assignment  
93  
SM_MA8  
+1.8VSUS  
SM_MA5  
SM_MA3  
SM_MA1  
+1.8VSUS  
SM_MA10  
SM_BS0  
SM_WE#  
+1.8VSUS  
SM_CAS#  
M_CS#1  
+1.8VSUS  
M_ODT1  
GND  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
I
94  
SM_MA6  
+1.8VSUS  
SM_MA4  
SM_MA2  
SM_MA0  
+1.8VSUS  
SM_BS1  
SM_RAS#  
M_CS#0  
+1.8VSUS  
M_ODT0  
SM_MA13  
+1.8VSUS  
NC  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I
95  
96  
97  
98  
99  
100  
102  
104  
106  
108  
110  
112  
114  
116  
118  
120  
122  
124  
126  
128  
130  
132  
134  
136  
138  
140  
101  
103  
105  
107  
109  
111  
113  
115  
117  
119  
121  
123  
125  
127  
129  
131  
133  
135  
137  
139  
I
I
I
---  
I
---  
I
I
I/O  
---  
---  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I
---  
I
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
GND  
SM_DQ35  
SM_DQ37  
GND  
SM_DQ32  
SM_DQ36  
GND  
SM_DQS#4  
SM_DQS4  
GND  
SM_DM4  
GND  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
SM_DQ33  
SM_DQ34  
GND  
SM_DQ38  
SM_DQ39  
GND  
SM_DQ44  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pin Assignment  
141  
143  
145  
147  
149  
151  
153  
155  
157  
159  
161  
163  
165  
167  
169  
171  
173  
175  
177  
179  
181  
183  
185  
187  
SM_DQ40  
SM_DQ41  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
142  
144  
146  
148  
150  
152  
154  
156  
158  
160  
162  
164  
166  
168  
170  
172  
174  
176  
178  
180  
182  
184  
186  
188  
SM_DQ45  
GND  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I
SM_DQS#5  
SM_DQS5  
GND  
SM_DM5  
GND  
I
---  
SM_DQ42  
SM_DQ46  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
SM_DQ43  
SM_DQ47  
GND  
SM_DQ48  
SM_DQ49  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
SM_DQ52  
SM_DQ53  
GND  
NC  
---  
SM_CLK1  
SM_CLK#1  
GND  
GND  
---  
I
SM_DQS#6  
SM_DQS6  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
---  
I
SM_DM6  
GND  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
SM_DQ50  
SM_DQ51  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
SM_DQ54  
SM_DQ55  
GND  
SM_DQ56  
SM_DQ60  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
SM_DQ61  
SM_DQ57  
GND  
SM_DM7  
GND  
I
SM_DQS#7  
SM_DQS7  
---  
20  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pin Assignment  
189  
SM_DQ62  
SM_DQ58  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
190  
192  
194  
196  
198  
200  
GND  
---  
191  
193  
195  
197  
199  
SM_DQ59  
SM_DQ63  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
CGDAT_SMB  
CGCLK_SMB  
+3V  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
SA0  
---  
SA1  
---  
CN25 1394 Port  
CONN DIP (1394) 4P 2R FR(P1.6,H5.6) L-F  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
I/O  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
I/O  
1
3
5
1394_TPB0- O  
1394_TPA0- O  
2
4
6
1394_TPB0+ O  
1394_TPA0+ O  
GND  
---  
GND  
---  
CN26 ODD Connector  
CONN DIP HOUSING50P 4R FR (P0.8, H6.0)  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
NC  
I/O  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
NC  
I/O  
1
3
5
7
---  
---  
O
2
4
6
8
---  
NC  
GND  
---  
IDERST#  
PDD7  
PDD8  
PDD9  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pin Assignment  
9
PDD6  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
22  
24  
26  
28  
30  
32  
34  
36  
38  
40  
42  
44  
46  
48  
50  
52  
PDD10  
PDD11  
PDD12  
PDD13  
PDD14  
PDD15  
PDDREQ  
PDIOR#  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
O
11  
13  
15  
17  
19  
21  
23  
25  
27  
29  
31  
33  
35  
37  
39  
41  
43  
45  
47  
49  
51  
PDD5  
PDD4  
PDD3  
PDD2  
PDD1  
PDD0  
GND  
I
PDIOW#  
PIORDY  
IRQ14  
PDA1  
---  
I
O
PDDACK#  
NC  
O
---  
---  
I/O  
O
I/O  
I/O  
I
PDIAG#  
PDA2  
PDA0  
PDCS1#  
ODDLED#  
PDCS3#  
O
+5V_ODD ---  
+5V_ODD ---  
+5V_ODD ---  
+5V_ODD ---  
+5V_ODD ---  
GND  
GND  
RCSEL  
NC  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
GND  
GND  
GND  
NC  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
GND  
GND  
22  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pin Assignment  
CN27 VGA Interface Connector  
CONN SMD HS 180P FR (P0.5, H4.15) EP  
PIN No.  
1
Signal name  
PEG_TXP0  
I/O  
I/O  
PIN No.  
2
Signal name  
PEG_RXP0  
I/O  
I/O  
3
PEG_TXN0  
GND  
I/O  
---  
4
PEG_RXN0  
GND  
I/O  
---  
5
6
7
PEG_TXP1  
PEG_TXN1  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
8
PEG_RXP1  
PEG_RXN1  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
9
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
22  
24  
26  
28  
30  
32  
34  
36  
38  
40  
42  
11  
13  
15  
17  
19  
21  
23  
25  
27  
29  
31  
33  
35  
37  
39  
41  
PEG_TXP2  
PEG_TXN2  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
PEG_RXP2  
PEG_RXN2  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
PEG_TXP3  
PEG_TXN3  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
PEG_RXP3  
PEG_RXN3  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
PEG_TXP4  
PEG_TXN4  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
PEG_RXP4  
PEG_RXN4  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
PEG_TXP5  
PEG_TXN5  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
PEG_RXP5  
PEG_RXN5  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
PEG_TXP6  
PEG_TXN6  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
PEG_RXP6  
PEG_RXN6  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pin Assignment  
43  
45  
47  
49  
51  
53  
55  
57  
59  
61  
63  
65  
67  
69  
71  
73  
75  
77  
79  
81  
83  
85  
87  
89  
PEG_TXP7  
PEG_TXN7  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
44  
46  
48  
50  
52  
54  
56  
58  
60  
62  
64  
66  
68  
70  
72  
74  
76  
78  
80  
82  
84  
86  
88  
90  
PEG_RXP7  
PEG_RXN7  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
PEG_TXP8  
PEG_TXN8  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
PEG_RXP8  
PEG_RXN8  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
PEG_TXP9  
PEG_TXN9  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
PEG_RXP9  
PEG_RXN9  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
PEG_TXP10  
PEG_TXN10  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
PEG_RXP10  
PEG_RXN10  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
PEG_TXP11  
PEG_TXN11  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
PEG_RXP11  
PEG_RXN11  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
PEG_TXP12  
PEG_TXN12  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
PEG_RXP12  
PEG_RXN12  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
PEG_TXP13  
PEG_TXN13  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
PEG_RXP13  
PEG_RXN13  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
PEG_TXP14  
PEG_TXN14  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
PEG_RXP14  
PEG_RXN14  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
24  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pin Assignment  
91  
PEG_TXP15  
PEG_TXN15  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I
92  
PEG_RXP15  
PEG_RXN15  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
27M_VGA  
27MSS_VGA  
GND  
98  
PECLK_VGA  
PECLK_VGA#  
GND  
99  
I
100  
102  
104  
106  
108  
110  
112  
114  
116  
118  
120  
122  
124  
126  
128  
130  
132  
134  
136  
138  
I
101  
103  
105  
107  
109  
111  
113  
115  
117  
119  
121  
123  
125  
127  
129  
131  
133  
135  
137  
---  
---  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
O
---  
I
GND  
PLTRST#  
SYSFANON#  
MAINON  
DVI_HPD  
HWPG_VGA  
MBDATA  
MBCLK  
EV_BLON  
EV_PNLON  
GND  
GND  
O
EXT_CRTDDCCLK  
EXT_CRTDDCDAT  
GND  
I
I
O
DVI_DDCDAT  
DVI_DDCCLK  
GND  
I/O  
I/O  
O
LVDS_PNLCLK  
LVDS_PNLDAT  
GND  
O
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
+3V  
EXT_HSYNC  
EXT_VSYNC  
GND  
+3V  
O
+3V  
---  
O
+3V  
EXT_VGA_RED  
EXT_VGA_GRN  
EXT_VGA_BLU  
GND  
+3V  
O
+2.5V  
O
+2.5V  
---  
+2.5V  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pin Assignment  
139  
141  
143  
145  
147  
149  
151  
153  
155  
157  
159  
161  
163  
165  
167  
169  
171  
173  
175  
177  
179  
181  
NC  
---  
O
140  
142  
144  
146  
148  
150  
152  
154  
156  
158  
160  
162  
164  
166  
168  
170  
172  
174  
176  
178  
180  
182  
+2.5V  
---  
---  
---  
---  
O
EXT_TV_Y/G  
EXT_TV_C/R  
GND  
+2.5V  
O
GND  
---  
O
GND  
EXT_DVI_TX2+  
EXT_DVI_TX2-  
GND  
EXT_DVI_TX0+  
EXT_DVI_TX0-  
GND  
O
O
---  
O
---  
O
EXT_DVI_CLK+  
EXT_DVI_CLK-  
GND  
EXT_DVI_TX1+  
EXT_DVI_TX1-  
GND  
O
O
---  
O
---  
EXT_LVDS_TXL0  
EXT_LVDS_TXL#0  
GND  
EXT_LVDS_TXU0  
EXT_LVDS_TXU#0  
GND  
O
O
O
---  
O
---  
O
EXT_LVDS_TXL1  
EXT_LVDS_TXL#1  
GND  
EXT_LVDS_TXU1  
EXT_LVDS_TXU#1  
GND  
O
O
---  
O
---  
O
EXT_LVDS_TXL2  
EXT_LVDS_TXL#2  
GND  
EXT_LVDS_TXU2  
EXT_LVDS_TXU#2  
GND  
O
O
---  
O
---  
O
EXT_LVDS_TXLCK  
EXT_LVDS_TXUCK  
EXT_LVDS_TXLCK# O  
GND ---  
EXT_LVDS_TXUCK# O  
GND  
---  
26  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pin Assignment  
CN28 Modem Board Connector  
CONN SMD HEADER 12P, 2R, MS (P0.8, H2.4)  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
PWRCLKN  
PWRCLKP  
NC  
I/O  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
GND  
I/O  
1
3
5
7
9
I/O  
I/O  
---  
2
4
6
8
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
GND  
GND  
DIB_DATAP I/O  
DIB_DATAN I/O  
GND  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
GND  
11  
13  
15  
17  
NC  
---  
---  
---  
---  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
CN29 New Card Connector  
CONN SMD HEADER 26P1R MR (P1.0, H4.75)  
PIN No. Signal name I/O PIN No.  
GND  
Signal name  
USBP-  
I/O  
1
3
5
7
9
---  
2
4
6
8
I/O  
USBP+  
NC  
I/O  
---  
CPUSB#  
O
NC  
---  
O
NEW_SMCLK O  
+NEW_1.5V ---  
NEW_SMDATA  
+NEW_1.5V  
10  
---  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pin Assignment  
11  
13  
15  
17  
19  
21  
23  
25  
27  
29  
WAKW#  
PERST#  
+NEW_3V  
CPPE#  
---  
O
---  
O
I
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
22  
24  
26  
28  
30  
+NEW_3VAUX ---  
+NEW_3V ---  
NEW_CLKREQ# O  
PECLK_NEW#  
GND  
I
PECLK_NEW  
PCIE_RXN  
GND  
---  
O
I
O
---  
I
PCIE_RXP  
PCIE_TXN  
GND  
PCIE_TXP  
GND  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
GND  
GND  
GND  
CN30 Mini Card Connector  
CONN DIP HOUSING 52P 2R FR (P0.8, H5.6) EP  
PIN No. Signal name I/O PIN No.  
WAKE#  
Signal name  
+3V  
I/O  
1
3
5
7
9
O
2
4
6
8
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
WCS_DATR  
WCS_CLKR  
---  
---  
GND  
+1.5V  
NC  
MINI_CLKREQ# O  
GND  
---  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
NC  
11  
13  
15  
17  
PECLK_MINI#  
PECLK_MINI  
GND  
I
NC  
I
NC  
---  
---  
NC  
NC  
GND  
28  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pin Assignment  
19  
NC  
---  
---  
O
20  
22  
24  
26  
28  
30  
32  
34  
36  
38  
40  
42  
44  
46  
48  
50  
52  
RF_EN  
PLTRST#  
+3VSUS  
GND  
I
21  
23  
25  
27  
29  
31  
33  
35  
37  
39  
41  
43  
45  
47  
49  
51  
GND  
PCIE_RXN  
PCIE_RXP  
GND  
GND  
PCIE_TXN  
PCIE_TXP  
GND  
NC  
I
---  
---  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
O
---  
---  
I
+1.5V  
PCLK_SMB  
PDAT_SMB  
GND  
I
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
USBP-  
USBP+  
GND  
NC  
NC  
LED_WWAN# ---  
NC  
WL_LED  
BT_LED  
+1.5V  
O
NC  
O
NC  
---  
---  
---  
NC  
GND  
NC  
+3V  
CN31 5 in 1 Card Connector  
CONN HEADER 46P 2R MS (P0.8, H6.2)  
PIN  
No.  
Signal name  
I/O  
PIN  
No.  
Signal name  
I/O  
1
GND  
---  
2
MSBS_SDCMD_SMWE# O  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pin Assignment  
3
MSD1_SDD1_SMD1  
MSD2_SDD2_SMD2  
MSD3_SDD3_SMD3  
VCC_FM  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
4
MSD0_SDD0_SMD0  
I/O  
O
5
6
MS_CD#  
7
8
MSCK_SDCK_SMWP#  
I
9
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
22  
24  
26  
28  
30  
32  
34  
36  
38  
40  
42  
44  
GND  
---  
I/O  
---  
I
11  
13  
15  
17  
19  
21  
23  
25  
27  
29  
31  
33  
35  
37  
39  
41  
43  
MSD2_SDD2_SMD2  
I/O  
MSD3_SDD3_SMD3  
MSBS_SDCMD_SMWE# O  
GND  
VCC_FM  
---  
MSCK_SDCK_SMWP#  
GND  
---  
I/O  
O
NC  
---  
I/O  
---  
---  
O
MSD0_SDD0_SMD0  
SD_CD#  
MSD1_SDD1_SMD1  
GND  
XD_CD#  
O
GND  
SM_R/B#  
I
SM_RE#  
SDWP_SMCE#  
SM_ALE  
O
SM_CLE  
I/O  
I/O  
I
MSBS_SDCMD_SMWE# I/O  
MSCK_SDCK_SMWP#  
MSD1_SDD1_SMD0  
MSD1_SDD1_SMD2  
SM_D4  
GND  
---  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
I/O  
MSD1_SDD1_SMD1  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
---  
MSD3_SDD3_SMD3  
SM_D5  
SM_D7  
NC  
SM_D6  
VCC_FM  
SDWP_SMCE#  
GND  
---  
CN32 Audio Board Connector  
30  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pin Assignment  
CONN SMD FFC 20P 1R FR (P0.5, H2.0)  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
SPKL  
I/O  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
SPKR  
I/O  
1
3
5
7
9
O
O
O
O
2
4
6
8
O
O
O
O
---  
PORT_B_L  
MIC_R  
PORT_B_R  
MIC_L  
SENSEA  
SENSEB  
GND  
AUD_VOL ---  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
11  
13  
15  
17  
19  
IRRX  
O
O
O
WLAN_LED O  
Kill_LED  
WL_SW#  
LID591#  
SPKPLG  
+5V  
O
O
SPDIF_OUT O  
+3V_S5 ---  
---  
---  
+5V_SP  
CN33 Speaker LED Connector  
CONN SMD HOUSING 4P 1R FR (P1.25, H1.85)  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
I/O  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
GND  
I/O  
1
3
+VSPKLED ---  
+VSPKLED ---  
2
4
---  
---  
GND  
PJ1 Battery Connector  
CONN DIP HD 7P 1R MR (P2.5, H4.0)  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
MBAT  
I/O  
PIN No.  
Signal name  
BATT_IN  
I/O  
1
---  
2
O
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pin Assignment  
3
5
7
NC  
---  
4
6
TEMP_MBAT O  
CLK  
DATA  
GND  
I/O  
---  
O
32  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix. D  
Appendix D Display Codes  
D.1  
Display Codes  
Table D-1 Scan codes (set 1 and set 2) (1/4)  
Code set 1  
Code set 2  
Break  
Cap  
Keytop  
Note  
No.  
Make  
Break  
Make  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
‘ ~  
1 !  
29  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
0A  
0B  
0C  
0D  
A9  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
8A  
8B  
8C  
8D  
0E  
16  
1E  
26  
25  
2E  
36  
3D  
3E  
46  
45  
4E  
55  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
0E  
16  
1E  
26  
25  
2E  
36  
3D  
3E  
46  
45  
4E  
55  
2 @  
3 #  
4 $  
5 %  
6 ^  
7 &  
8 *  
*2  
*2  
*2  
9 (  
0 )  
- _  
= +  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
BkSp  
Tab  
Q
0E  
0F  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
13  
19  
1A  
1B  
8E  
8F  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
98  
99  
9A  
9B  
66  
0D  
15  
1D  
24  
2D  
2C  
35  
3C  
43  
44  
4D  
54  
5B  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
66  
0D  
15  
1D  
24  
2D  
2C  
35  
3C  
43  
44  
4D  
54  
5B  
W
E
R
T
Y
U
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
I
O
P
[ {  
] }  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
D-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display codes  
Table D-1 Scan codes (set 1 and set 2) (2/4)  
Code set 1  
Code set 2  
Break  
Cap  
No.  
Keytop  
Note  
Make  
Break  
Make  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
\ |  
2B  
3A  
1E  
1F  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
AB  
BA  
9E  
9F  
A0  
A1  
A2  
A3  
A4  
A5  
A6  
A7  
A8  
5D  
58  
1C  
1B  
23  
2B  
34  
33  
3B  
42  
4B  
4C  
52  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
5D  
58  
1C  
1B  
23  
2B  
34  
33  
3B  
42  
4B  
4C  
52  
*5  
Caps Lock  
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
K
L
; :  
‘ “  
43  
44  
45  
Enter  
1C  
2A  
56  
9C  
AA  
D6  
5A  
12  
61  
F0  
F0  
F0  
5A  
12  
61  
*3  
Shift (L)  
No.102  
key  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
Z
X
2C  
2D  
2E  
2F  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
AC  
AD  
AE  
AF  
B0  
B1  
B2  
B3  
B4  
B5  
1A  
22  
21  
2A  
32  
31  
3A  
41  
49  
4A  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
1A  
22  
21  
2A  
32  
31  
3A  
41  
49  
4A  
C
V
B
N
M
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
, <  
. >  
/ ?  
57  
Shift (R)  
36  
B6  
59  
F0  
59  
D-2  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display codes  
Table D-1 Scan codes (set 1 and set 2) (3/4)  
Code set 1  
Code set 2  
Break  
Cap  
No.  
Keytop  
Note  
Make  
Break  
Make  
58  
Ctrl  
1D  
9D  
14  
F0  
14  
*3  
60  
61  
62  
Alt (L)  
Space  
38  
39  
B8  
B9  
11  
29  
F0  
F0  
11  
29  
11  
*3  
ALT (R)  
E0 38  
E0 B8 E0 11  
E0  
F0  
75  
76  
Ins  
E0 52  
E0 53  
E0 D2 E0 70  
E0 D3 E0 71  
E0  
E0  
F0  
F0  
70  
71  
*1  
*1  
Del  
79  
80  
81  
E0 4B E0 CB E0 6B E0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
6B  
6C  
69  
*1  
*1  
*1  
Home  
End  
E0 47  
E0 4F  
E0 C7 E0 6C E0  
E0 CF E0 69  
E0  
83  
84  
85  
86  
E0 48  
E0 50  
E0 49  
E0 51  
E0 C8 E0 75  
E0 D0 E0 72  
E0  
E0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
75  
72  
7D  
7A  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
PgUp  
PgDn  
E0 C9 E0 7D E0  
E0 D1 E0 7A E0  
89  
E0 4D E0 CD E0 74  
E0  
F0  
74  
*1  
110  
112  
113  
114  
115  
116  
117  
118  
119  
120  
121  
Esc  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
F7  
F8  
F9  
F10  
01  
3B  
3C  
3D  
3E  
3F  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
81  
BB  
BC  
BD  
BE  
BF  
C0  
C1  
C2  
C3  
C4  
76  
05  
06  
04  
0C  
03  
0B  
83  
0A  
01  
09  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
76  
05  
06  
04  
0C  
03  
0B  
83  
0A  
01  
09  
*3  
Satellite L20 Maintenance Manual (960-497)  
D-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display codes  
Table D-1 Scan codes (set 1 and set 2) (4/4)  
Cap  
No.  
Code set 1  
Make Break  
Code set 2  
Break  
Keytop  
Note  
Make  
78  
122  
123  
124  
F11  
F12  
57  
58  
*6  
D7  
D8  
*6  
F0  
F0  
*6  
78  
07  
*3  
*3  
*6  
07  
*6  
PrintSc  
126  
Pause  
*7  
*7  
*7  
*7  
*7  
*4  
202  
203  
204  
Fn  
1F E0  
2F E0  
Win  
App  
E0  
E0  
5B E0 DB E0  
5D E0 DD E0  
F0  
F0  
1F  
2F  
Notes:  
1. * Scan codes differ by mode.  
2. * Scan codes differ by overlay function.  
3. * Combined with the Fn key makes different codes.  
4. * Fn key does not generate a code by itself.  
5. * This key corresponds to key No. 42 in a 102-key model.  
6. * Refer to Table D-6, No. 124 key scan code.  
7. * Refer to Table D-7, No. 126 key scan code.  
D-4  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display codes  
Table D-2 Scan codes with left Shift key  
Cap  
No.  
Key  
top  
Code set 1  
Code set 2  
Make  
Break  
Make  
Break  
55  
75  
76  
79  
80  
81  
83  
84  
85  
86  
89  
203  
204  
/
E0 AA E0 35 E0 B5 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 4A E0 F0 4A E0 12  
E0 AA E0 52 E0 D2 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 70 E0 F0 70 E0 12  
INS  
DEL E0 AA E0 53 E0 D3 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 71 E0 F0 71 E0 12  
E0 AA E0 4B E0 CB E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 6B E0 F0 6B E0 12  
Home E0 AA E0 47 E0 C7 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 6C E0 F0 6C E0 12  
End  
E0 AA E0 4F E0 CF E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 69 E0 F0 69 E0 12  
E0 AA E0 48 E0 C8 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 75 E0 F0 75 E0 12  
E0 AA E0 50 E0 D0 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 72 E0 F0 72 E0 12  
PgUp E0 AA E0 49 E0 C9 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 7D E0 F0 7D E0 12  
PgDn E0 AA E0 51 E0 D1 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 7A E0 F0 7A E0 12  
E0 AA E0 4D E0 CD E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 74 E0 F0 74 E0 12  
E0 AA E0 5B E0 DB E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 1F E0 F0 1F E0 12  
E0 AA E0 5D E0 DD E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 2F E0 F0 2F E0 12  
Win  
App  
Note : The table above shows scan codes with the left Shift key. In combination with the  
right Shift key, scan codes are changed as listed below:  
With left Shift  
With right Shift  
Set 1  
Set 2  
E0 AA __________ E0 B6  
E0 2A ___________ E0 36  
E0 F0 12 ________ E0 F0 59  
E0 12 ___________ E0 59  
Satellite L20 Maintenance Manual (960-497)  
D-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display codes  
Table D-3 Scan codes in Numlock mode  
Cap  
No.  
Key  
top  
Code set 1  
Code set 2  
Make  
Break  
Make  
Break  
75  
76  
INS  
DEL  
E0 2A E0 52 E0 D2 E0 AA E0 12 E0 70 E0 F0 70 E0 F0 12  
E0 2A E0 53 E0 D3 E0 AA E0 12 E0 71 E0 F0 71 E0 F0 12  
E0 2A E0 4B E0 CB E0 AA E0 12 E0 6B E0 F0 6B E0 F0 12  
79  
80  
Home E0 2A E0 47 E0 C7 E0 AA E0 12 E0 6C E0 F0 6C E0 F0 12  
81  
End  
E0 2A E0 4F E0 CF E0 AA E0 12 E0 69 E0 F0 69 E0 F0 12  
E0 2A E0 48 E0 C8 E0 AA E0 12 E0 75 E0 F0 75 E0 F0 12  
E0 2A E0 50 E0 D0 E0 AA E0 12 E0 72 E0 F0 72 E0 F0 12  
E0 2A E0 49 E0 C9 E0 AA E0 12 E0 7D E0 F0 7D E0 F0 12  
E0 2A E0 51 E0 D1 E0 AA E0 12 E0 7A E0 F0 7A E0 F0 12  
E0 2A E0 4D E0 CD E0 AA E0 12 E0 74 E0 F0 74 E0 F0 12  
E0 2A E0 5B E0 DB E0 AA E0 12 E0 1F E0 F0 1F E0 F0 12  
E0 2A E0 5D E0 DD E0 AA E0 12 E0 2F E0 F0 2F E0 F0 12  
83  
84  
85  
PgUp  
PgDn  
86  
89  
203  
204  
Win  
App  
Table D-4 Scan codes with Fn key  
Cap  
Code set 1  
Make Break  
Code set 2  
Break  
No.  
Keytop  
Make  
5A  
43  
58  
ENT  
CTRL  
E0  
E0  
E0  
1C  
1D  
38  
E0  
E0  
E0  
9C  
9D  
B8  
E0  
E0  
E0  
E0  
E0  
E0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
5A  
14  
11  
14  
11  
60  
LALT  
121  
122  
123  
ARROW  
45  
45  
46  
C5  
77  
77  
7E  
F0  
F0  
F0  
77  
77  
7E  
NUMERIC  
Scrl  
C5  
C5  
D-6  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display codes  
Table D-5 Scan codes in overlay mode  
Code set 1  
Code set 2  
Cap  
No.  
Keytop  
(8)  
Make  
Break  
Make  
Break  
09  
10  
11  
23  
24  
25  
26  
37  
38  
39  
40  
52  
54  
55  
8
9
0
U
I
48  
49  
37  
4B  
4C  
4D  
4A  
4F  
50  
51  
4E  
52  
53  
C8  
C9  
B7  
CB  
CC  
CD  
CA  
CF  
D0  
D1  
CE  
D2  
D3  
75  
7D  
7C  
6B  
73  
74  
7B  
69  
72  
7A  
79  
70  
71  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
E0  
75  
7D  
7C  
6B  
73  
74  
7B  
69  
72  
7A  
79  
70  
71  
(9)  
(*)  
(4)  
(5)  
(6)  
(–)  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(+)  
(0)  
(.)  
O
P
J
K
L
;
M
.
/
(/)  
E0  
35  
E0  
B5  
40  
4A  
F0  
4A  
Table D-6 No.124 key scan code  
Key  
top  
Code set 1  
Code set 2  
Shift  
Make  
Break  
Make  
Break  
Prt Sc Common E0 2A E0 37 E0 B7 E0 AA E0 12 E0 7C E0 F0 7C E0 F0 12  
E0 37  
E0 37  
54  
E0 B7  
E0 B7  
D4  
E0 7C  
E0 7C  
84  
E0 F0 7C  
E0 F0 7C  
F0 B4  
Ctrl +  
Shift +  
Alt +  
Satellite L20 Maintenance Manual (960-497)  
D-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display codes  
Table D-7 No.126 key scan code  
Key  
top  
Shift  
Code set 1  
Make  
Code set 2  
Make  
Pause Common* E1 1D 45 E1 9D C5 E1 14 77 E1 F0 14  
Ctrl* E0 46 E0 C6 E0 7E E0 F0 7E  
F0 77  
*: This key generates only make codes.  
D-8  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E  
Key Layout  
Appendix E Keyboard Layout  
E.1  
United States (US) Keyboard  
Figure E-1 US Keyboard layout  
E.2  
United Kingdom (UK) Keyboard  
Figure E-2 UK Keyboard layout  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
E-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keyboard Layout  
E.3  
Arabia (AR) Keyboard  
Figure E-3 AR Keyboard layout  
E.4  
Belgium (BB) Keyboard  
Figure E-4 BB Keyboard layout  
E-2  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keyboard Layout  
Appendices  
E.5  
Czech (CZ) Keyboard  
FigureE-5 CZ Keyboard layout  
E.6  
German (GR) Keyboard  
Figure E-6 GR Keyboard layout  
Satellite Denver Maintenance Manual(P100)  
E-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keyboard Layout  
E.7  
Danish (DK) Keyboard  
Figure E-7 DK Keyboard layout  
E.8  
Spanish (SP) Keyboard  
Figure E-8 SP Keyboard layout  
E-4  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keyboard Layout  
Appendices  
E.9  
French (FR) Keyboard  
Figure E-9 FR Keyboard layout  
E.10  
Hungary(HU) Keyboard  
Figure E-10 HUR Keyboard layout  
Satellite Denver Maintenance Manual(P100)  
E-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keyboard Layout  
E.11  
Italian (IT) Keyboard  
Figure E-11 IT Keyboard layout  
E.12  
Korean (KR) Keyboard  
Figure E-12 KR Keyboard layout  
E-6  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keyboard Layout  
Appendices  
E.13  
Norwegian (NO) Keyboard  
Figure E-13 NO Keyboard layout  
E.14  
Portuguese (PT) Keyboard  
Figure E-14 PT Keyboard layout  
Satellite Denver Maintenance Manual(P100)  
E-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keyboard Layout  
E.15  
Traditional Chinese (TC) Keyboard  
Figure E-15 TC Keyboard layout  
E.16  
Swedish (SW) Keyboard  
Figure E-16 SW Keyboard layout  
E-8  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keyboard Layout  
Appendices  
E.17  
Russian (RU) Keyboard  
Figure E-17 RU Keyboard layout  
E.18  
Turkish (TR) Keyboard  
Figure E-18 TR Keyboard layout  
Satellite Denver Maintenance Manual(P100)  
E-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keyboard Layout  
E.19  
Japanese (JP) Keyboard  
Figure E-19 JP Keyboard layout  
E.20  
Swiss-German(SL) Keyboard  
Figure E-20 SL Keyboard layout  
E-10  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keyboard Layout  
Appendices  
E.21  
Hebrew Keyboard  
Figure E-21 Keyboard layout  
E.22  
Greek Keyboard  
Figure E-22 GK Keyboard layout  
Satellite Denver Maintenance Manual(P100)  
E-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F  
Appendix F Wiring Diagrams  
F.1 RGB Monitor ID Wraparound connector  
(1) RED  
RED  
(1)  
(2) GREEN  
(3) BLUE  
(4) NC  
GREEN (2)  
BLUE  
NC  
(3)  
(4)  
(5) GND  
(6) GND  
(7) GND  
(8) GND  
(9) 5V  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
5V  
(5)  
(6)  
(7)  
(8)  
(9)  
(10) GND  
(11) NC  
GND  
NC  
(10)  
(11)  
(12)  
(12) SDA  
(13) HSYNC  
(14) VSYNC  
(15) SDL  
SDA  
HSYNC (13)  
VSYNC (14)  
SCL  
(15)  
Figure F-1 RGB Monitor ID Wraparound connector (15PIN to 15PIN)  
F.2 LAN Loopback Connector  
(3) BIDBP (RX+)  
(4) BIDBN (RX-)  
(1) BIBAP ‘(TX+)  
(2) BIDAN (TX-)  
Figure F-2 LAN loopback connector  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
F-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wiring Diagrams  
F-2  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix G  
Appendix G BIOS Rewrite Procedures  
This Appendix explains how to rewrite the system BIOS program when you update the  
system BIOS.  
Tools  
To rewrite the BIOS, you need the following tool:  
BIOS/EC/KBC rewriting disk  
USB doggle  
Rewriting the BIOS  
1. Set the system to boot mode.  
2. Turn off the power to the computer.  
3. Remove the external cables and cards.  
4. Connect an external FDD and insert the BIOS rewriting disk into the external FDD.  
5. Connect the USB doggle special for BIOS rewrite  
6. Turn on the power  
7. The BIOS rewriting starts.  
8. When the process is completed, it beeps and the system automatically reboots.  
NOTE: 1. Connect the AC adaptor to the computer when you rewrite the BIOS.  
2. Do not turn off the power while you are rewriting the BIOS.  
If the rewrite fails, it might be impossible to start up the computer.  
3. If you fail to rewrite BIOS, then when you next turn on the power, a  
message may be displayed that the contents of the BIOS have been erased  
or system can not boot . In this case, insert the BIOS rewriting disk, and the  
BIOS will be rewritten.  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
G-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix H  
Appendix H EC/KBC Rewrite Procedures  
Same as BIOS rewrite Procedures, please refer appendix G  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
H-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix I  
Reliability  
Appendix I Reliability  
The following table shows MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) in maximum configuration.  
Table I-1 MTBF  
Component  
System  
Time (hours)  
6678.69  
Satellite P100 Maintenance Manual(960-Q02)  
I-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reliability  
I-2  
Satellite L10 Maintenance Manual(960-Q01)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Tascam Universal Remote RC 898 User Manual
Taylor Scale TE10C User Manual
TDK Network Card HHM Series HHM1763B2 User Manual
TIMEX Weather Products Outdoor Timer TM05 User Manual
Toastmaster Coffeemaker TCM4R User Manual
Tricity Bendix Cooktop SIE 505 User Manual
Tripp Lite TV Cables N820 03M User Manual
Vizio Computer Hardware PCG 808 User Manual
VTech Cordless Telephone gz2338 User Manual
VTech Telephone gz5838 User Manual